Yamaha PSR-S950 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-S950

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Merci d'avoir choisi ce Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Yamaha !

Nous vous conseillons de lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi afin de tirer pleinement profit des fonctions

avancées et très utiles de votre instrument.

Nous vous recommandons également de garder ce manuel à portée de main pour toute référence ultérieure.

Avant d'utiliser l'instrument, lisez attentivement la section « PRÉCAUTIONS D'USAGE » aux pages 4 et 5.

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Workstation!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4 – 5.

English

Français

Owner’s Manual

Mode d'emploi

Digital Workstation

Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel

EnglishFrançais

2 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Included Accessories ......................................................6

Formats ............................................................................6

About the Manuals ...........................................................7

Welcome to Digital Workstation 8

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Starting Up 14

Turning the Power On and Playing the Keyboard..........14

Adjusting the Contrast of the Display

(PSR-S750 only) .............................................................16

Changing the Display Language ...................................16

Displaying the Version Number .....................................17

Playing the Demos .........................................................17

Basic Operations 18

Display-based Controls..................................................18

Messages Shown in the Display ....................................21

Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access........21

Main Display Configuration............................................22

File Selection Display Configuration ..............................24

File Management ...........................................................26

Entering Characters .......................................................30

Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings.............31

Data Backup ..................................................................31

1 Voices

– Playing the keyboard – 32

Playing Preset Voices ....................................................32

Expanding Voices ..........................................................36

Transposing the Pitch of the Keyboard..........................38

Using the Wheels ...........................................................39

Applying Voice Effects...................................................39

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices..................41

2Styles

– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 43

Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment...............43

Chords ...........................................................................45

Operating Style Playback...............................................46

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the

Current Style (Repertoire) ..............................................48

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the

Current Style (One Touch Setting) .................................49

Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance

(Style Recommender) ....................................................50

Turning Style Parts On/Off and Changing Voices..........52

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Style

and Keyboard ................................................................53

3 Songs

– Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 54

Playback of Songs .........................................................54

Displaying Music Notation (Score).................................56

Displaying Lyrics (Text)..................................................57

Turning Song Channels On/Off......................................57

Practicing the Right-hand Part with Guide Functions ....58

Repeat Playback............................................................59

Recording Your Performance.........................................60

4USB Audio

– Playback and Recording Audio Files – 64

Playing Back Audio Files ...............................................64

Recording Your Performance as Audio .........................67

5 Multi Pads

–

Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance

–69

Playing the Multi Pads....................................................69

Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function ..................70

Using Chord Match........................................................70

Using WAVE Files for the Multi Pads .............................71

6 Music Finder

–

Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance

–73

Selecting a Record (Your Desired Music Genre) ..........75

Finding Your Desired Record (Panel Settings) via

Search............................................................................76

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File .........................77

7 Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 79

Registering Your Panel Setups ......................................79

Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file .............80

Recalling a Registered Panel Setup ..............................81

8 Microphone

–

Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing

–82

Connecting a Microphone .............................................82

Applying the Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Voice.......83

9 Mixing Console

– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 86

Basic Procedure ............................................................86

10 Connections

– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 88

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar

([MIC/LINE IN] jack).......................................................88

Connecting Audio Devices

(OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) ..................89

Connecting a Separate TV Monitor

([VIDEO OUT] jack)........................................................90

Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller

([FOOT PEDAL] jacks)...................................................91

Connecting a USB Flash Memory

([USB TO DEVICE] terminal)..........................................92

Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal) .93

Connecting External MIDI Devices

(MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals)............................................94

11 Utility

– Making Global Settings – 95

Basic Procedure ............................................................95

Troubleshooting 96

Specifications 99

Index 101

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 3

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or

adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name

plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or con-

necting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not

recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum

wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller

the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied

or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a

cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instruc-

tions that accompany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct

at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to

change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obli-

gation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound

levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate

for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is

uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in

the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches

are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No

other uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to

how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as

designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and

are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual

carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and

environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products

and the production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which

(if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type

of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the

replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of

these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being

charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for

the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones,

and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be

installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in

overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all

batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly

and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any

retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery dis-

posal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some

reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please

observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the

disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If

your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha

directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The

model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are

located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

4 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the

following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also,

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on

it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 100) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)

containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as

water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall

over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected

by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent

adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the

instrument overheating.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage

to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power

cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

DMI-5 1/2

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel.

This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or

other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the

possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• The edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings are lost when you turn off the power of the instrument without saving. Save the edited data to the instrument

(USER tab display) or a USB flash memory (USB tab display); see page 24. Moreover, it is safer to save the data to a USB flash memory, because the data in the USER tab

display may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. To protect against data loss through USB flash memory damage, we recommend that you save your important

data onto two USB flash memories.

• Data other than above (edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings) is automatically stored, when you change the settings in a display page and then exit from

that page. However, the data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights.

Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR

USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this

device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

• (PSR-S950) MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Connections

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

DMI-5 2/2

6 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• Online Member Product Registration

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet in order to fill out the User Registration form.

•Music Rest

•AC Power Adaptor

This may not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Formats

The instrument is compatible with the following formats.

“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification

that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice

selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more

Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well

into the future.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM spe-

cifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and

effects.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expand-

ability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.

“SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-

quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of

SFF, which features improved note transposition for guitar tracks.

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for the songs pre-installed in this instrument:

(PSR-S950, PSR-S750)

Beauty And The Beast

from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST

Lyrics by Howard Ashman

Music by Alan Menken

(PSR-S950)

Achy Breaky Heart (Don’t Tell My Heart)

Words and Music by Don Von Tress

(PSR-S750)

Can’t Help Falling In Love

from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII

Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore

Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 7

About the Manuals

This instrument has the following document and instructional materials.

 Included Document

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Provides overall explanations of the PSR-S950/S750 basic functions. See “How to use this Owner’s Manual” below.

 Online Materials (PDF)

Reference Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Explains advanced features of the instrument, not explained in the Owner’s Manual. For example, you can learn how

to create original Styles, Songs or Multi Pads, or find detailed explanations of specific parameters.

Data List

Contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDI-related information.

Computer-related Operations

Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transferring song data.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book.

To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Manual Library, enter “PSR-S950,” “PSR-S750” or “MIDI Basics” to the Model

Name box, then click [SEARCH].

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Provides an overview of

the chapter contents.

Shows the location of

buttons which are

explained in the chap-

ter.

The displays are taken

from the PSR-S950,

and in English. (These

may appear somewhat

different from those on

your instrument.)

Boxed sections pro-

vide additional helpful

information.

Shows that this function

is only available on one

model.

Ex.: These icons indicate

that this function is only

on the PSR-S950 but not

on the PSR-S750.

Provides supplemen-

tary notes and detailed

information.

Introduces advanced features related

to the chapter contents.

Detailed explanations are provided in

the Reference Manual (above).

Chapter title for navigating

through the manual.

How to use this Owner’s Manual

8 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Welcome to Digital Workstation

Explore the Demos Starting Up

The Demos showcase the variety of stunning Voices and

Styles on the instrument, and give you hands-on experience

using it.

Play a Wide Variety of Instrument Voices Chapter 1 Voices

The instrument gives you not only

various realistic piano Voices, but also

features an exceptionally wide variety

of authentic instruments, both acoustic

and electronic.

Perform Along with a Backing Band

Chapter 2 Styles

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically

plays the auto accompaniment backing (Style

function). Select an accompaniment style — such

as pop, jazz, Latin, and various other music

genres in the world — and let the instrument be

your backing band!

Play Along with Song Data Chapter 3 Songs

Displaying Music Score ................page 56

While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation)

automatically shown on the display — an exceptionally convenient tool for

learning and practicing pieces.

Recording Your Performance ................page 60

The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to

internal memory or a USB flash memory. The instrument also lets you listen

back to your performance, and further edit it or utilize it for your music

production.

Playing Back Songs ................page 54

Play along with a Song data, and fill out your solo performance with the sounds of an entire band or orchestra.

Enjoy a wide variety of songs — commercially available music data and preset songs.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 9

Welcome to Digital Workstation

Add Phrases and Rhythms to Your Performance

Chapter 5 Multi Pads

You can add spice to your performance with special short

phrases and rhythms, simply by tapping the Multi Pads.

Multi Pads also have an Audio Link function that allows you

to create your own audio data (sound effects, vocal

phrases, and so on), and trigger them from the Pads as you

perform.

Call Up the Ideal Voice and Style for Each Song

Chapter 6 Music Finder

The convenient Music Finder function lets you call up the ideal panel settings including the most suitable Voice,

Style, effects, etc. for each song, by selecting a “Record,” music genre or song title. Moreover, by registering

Songs, audio and Style files saved in various places into Music Finder, the instrument can call up these Songs,

audio and Style files easily from the song title.

Add Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing (PSR-S950)

Chapter 8

Microphone

The instrument also lets you directly connect a microphone and use a

variety of sophisticated processing tools specifically designed for

vocals. These include an amazing Vocal Harmony function, which

automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that

you sing into a microphone. You can even change the gender of the

harmony voices — for example, letting you add female backup to your

own male voice (or vice versa) — or use the Vocal Doubler to make

your single voice sound like many.

Audio Playing and Recording from USB Flash Memory

Chapter 4 USB Audio

Audio files (WAVE or MP3*) saved to USB flash memory can be

played back on the instrument. Moreover, you can record your

performance as audio file (WAVE) to a USB flash memory device.

On the PSR-S950, you can connect a microphone to the instrument

and enjoy recording your singing along with the keyboard

performance.

* The MP3 format is supported only by the PSR-S950.

On the PSR-S950 only, there are also a variety of advanced,

convenient audio playback and processing functions. These

include Repeat Mode, for specifying how audio files will be

repeatedly played back, and an A-B Repeat function, for repeating

a specific section in a audio song. Time Stretch lets you slow down

or speed up an audio file without changing the pitch, while Pitch

Shift lets you change the pitch of the audio without affecting the

time. Moreover, a Vocal Cancel function effectively attenuates the

vocals which may be positioned in the center of a file, allowing you

to sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing.

10 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

 Top Panel

[ ] (Standby/On) switch ..............................Page 14

Turns on the instrument’s power or sets to standby.

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................Page 14

Adjusts the overall volume.

[DEMO] button ................................................Page 17

Calls up the display for selecting a Demo.

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button

(PSR-S950)......................................................Page 83

Calls up the display for adding various effects to the Micro-

phone input.

SONG buttons.................................................Page 54

Selects a Song and controls Song playback.

STYLE category selection buttons ...............Page 43

Selects a Style category.

[TAP TEMPO]/TEMPO buttons ......................Page 47

Controls the tempo for Style, Song and Metronome playback.

TRANSPOSE buttons .....................................Page 38

Transposes the entire pitch of the instrument in semitone

steps.

[METRONOME] button

Turns the metronome on or off.

[FADE IN/OUT] button.................................... Page 47

Controls fade in/out of Style/Song playback.

STYLE CONTROL buttons............................. Page 46

Controls Style playback.

[PITCH BEND] wheel...................................... Page 39

Bends the pitch of the keyboard played sound up or down.

[MODULATION] wheel ................................... Page 39

Applies a vibrato effect.

[PHONES] jack ............................................... Page 13

For connecting a pair of headphones.

[LCD CONTRAST] knob (PSR-S750) ............ Page 16

Adjusts the LCD contrast.

LCD and related controls .............................. Page 18

[BALANCE] button ......................................... Page 53

Calls up settings for the volume balance among the parts.

(PSR-S750)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 11

Panel Controls and Terminals

[MIXING CONSOLE] button ...........................Page 86

Calls up various settings for the keyboard, Style and Song

parts.

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] button...................Pages 52, 57

Calls up settings for turning Style/Song channels on or off.

[FUNCTION] button

(See Reference Manual on website.)

Lets you make advanced settings and create your original

Styles, Songs and Multi Pads.

VOICE category selection buttons................Page 32

Selects a Voice.

[USB AUDIO PLAYER] button........................page 64

Calls up the display for playing back audio files and record-

ing your performance in audio format.

[USB] button ...................................................page 24

Calls up the display for selecting a file in the USB flash

memory.

VOICE CONTROL buttons ............................. Page 39

Applies various effects to the keyboard performance.

[MUSIC FINDER] button................................. page 75

Calls up ideal panel setups for your performance.

PART SELECT buttons .................................. Page 35

Selects a keyboard part.

PART ON/OFF buttons ................................... Page 35

Turns the keyboard part on or off.

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ...............Page 79

Registers and recalls panel setups.

MULTI PAD CONTROL buttons ..................... Page 69

Selects and plays a rhythmic or melodic Multi Pad phrase.

ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ..................... Page 49

Calls up the appropriate panel settings for the Style.

UPPER OCTAVE buttons ............................... Page 38

Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps.

12 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

 Rear Panel

DC IN jack .......................................................Page 14

For connecting the power adaptor.

[FOOT PEDAL] jacks ......................................Page 91

For connecting Footswitches and/or Foot controllers.

OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks .............................Page 89

For connecting external audio devices.

[AUX IN] jack................................................... Page 89

For connecting an external audio device, such as a portable

audio player.

[MIC/LINE IN] jack (PSR-S950)...................... Page 88

For connecting a microphone or guitar.

[INPUT VOLUME] knob (PSR-S950).............. page 83

For adjusting the input level of the [MIC/LINE IN] jack.

Air Vents

NOTICE

This instrument has special air vents in the top panel and rear panel.

Do not place objects where they might block the air vent, since this

may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and

possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Attaching the Music Rest

The instrument is supplied with a music rest that can be

attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at

the rear of the top panel.

Air Vents

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 13

Panel Controls and Terminals

[MIC LINE] switch (PSR-S950).......................Page 88

For switching between “MIC” and “LINE” for proper use of

the [MIC/LINE IN] jack.

MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals...............................Page 94

For connecting external MIDI devices.

[USB TO HOST] terminal................................Page 93

For connecting to a computer.

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal............................ Page 92

For connecting a USB flash memory.

[VIDEO OUT] jack (PSR-S950) ...................... Page 90

For connecting to a television or video monitor.

Using the Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off

when a pair of headphones is plugged into the [PHONES] jack.

CAUTION

Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Standard phone plug

14 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Starting Up

1 Connect the power adaptor.

First connect one end of the AC cable to the power adaptor, then connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the

instrument’s DC IN jack on the rear panel. Finally, connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the electrical

outlet.

2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

The main display appears.

3 While playing the keyboard, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an

appropriate level.

Turning the Power On and Playing the Keyboard

WARNING

Use the specified adaptor (page 100) only. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-S950/S750, and

may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC POWER ADAPTOR FROM THE AC OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-S950/S750 IS

NOT IN USE.

1-1

1-3

Power adaptor

AC cable

1-2

DC plug

The shape of the plug and

outlet differs depending on

locale.

NOTE

Before the main display appears, turn-

ing the power off, operating the but-

tons and playing the keyboard cannot

be done.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 15

Starting Up

4 After you use the instrument, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power off.

While recording or editing, or while messages are displayed:

The power cannot be turned off even if you press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch.

If you need to force-quit the instrument in such a situation, press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for

longer than three seconds.

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically

turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses

before the power is automatically turned off can be set as described below (default setting: 30 min.). The setting is

retained even if the power is turned off.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 1

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “5. AUTO POWER OFF.”

3 Press the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the value.

If you do not want to turn the power off automatically (disable the Auto Power

Off), select OFF.

CAUTION

Even when the instrument is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the instrument for

an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

NOTICE

If you force-quit the instrument during recording or editing, the data might be lost, and the instrument and external devices might be dam-

aged.

Setting the Auto Power Off function

NOTE

Throughout this manual, arrows are

used in the instructions, indicating in

shorthand the process of calling up

certain displays and functions.

NOTICE

• Depending on the instrument

status, the power may not turn

off automatically, even after

the elapse of the specified

period of time. Always turn off

the power manually when the

instrument is not in use.

• The data which is not saved to

the USER or USB drive will be

lost if the power automatically

turns off. Make sure to save

your data before the power

turns off.

NOTE

The setting time is approximate.

16 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob

located to the left of the display.

This determines the language used in the display for messages.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER

2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired language.

Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method)

Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key (C1) on the keyboard. An “Auto power off disabled” mes-

sage appears briefly and Auto Power Off is disabled.

Adjusting the Contrast of the Display (PSR-S750 only)

NOTE

Since the color display of the PSR-

S950 has a high level of visibility, no

contrast adjustment function is neces-

sary.

Changing the Display Language

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 17

Starting Up

You can check the version number of this instrument.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER

2 Use the



]/[8



]

(VERSION) buttons to display the

version number.

3 Press the



]

(EXIT) button (or the panel [EXIT] button) to

return to the original display.

The Demos provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features and functions as well as sound

demonstrations.

1 Press the [DEMO] button to call up the Demo display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [E] and [J] buttons to show a specific

Demo.

Pressing one of the [F] – [I] buttons plays back the overview Demo

continuously, calling up the various displays in sequence.

The sub menus are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A] – [J]

buttons corresponding to the sub menu.

3 Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Demo

display.

Displaying the Version Number

Playing the Demos

NOTE

To return to the higher level menu,

press the [EXIT] button.

18 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operations

The LCD provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings. The displayed menu can be

selected or changed by the controls around the LCD.

The [A] – [J] buttons are used to select the corresponding menu.

• Example 1

• Example 2

Display-based Controls

[A] – [E] buttons

(see below)

[F] – [J] buttons

(see below)

TAB [E][F] buttons

(page 19)

[DIRECT ACCESS]

button (page 21)

[DATA ENTRY] dial and

[ENTER] button

(page 20)

[1 ] – [8 ] buttons

(page 19)

[EXIT] button

(page 21)

[A] – [J] buttons

In the File Selection display

(page 24), the [A] – [J] buttons can

be used to select the corresponding

respective files (Voices).

The [A] and [B] buttons are used to

move the cursor up or down.

The [H] and [I] buttons are used to select the

corresponding parameter.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 19

Basic Operations

These buttons are used mainly to change the pages of displays that have “tabs” at the top.

The [1 ] – [8 ] buttons are used to make selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for

functions shown directly above them.

TAB [

][

] buttons



] – [8



] buttons

For menus that appear in this section of

the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons.

For menus that appear in this section of the

display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons.

For list menus that appear, use the [1 ]

– [8 ] buttons to select the desired item.

For parameters that appear in slider (or knob)

form, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust

the value.

20 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Depending on the selected LCD, the [DATA ENTRY] dial can be used in the following two ways.

• Selecting files (including Voices, Styles and Songs)

When one of the File Selection displays (page 24) is shown, you can use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER]

button to select a file (Voices, Styles, Songs, and others).

• Adjusting the parameter values

You can conveniently use the [DATA ENTRY] dial in tandem with the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust

parameters indicated in the display.

This convenient technique also works well with pop-up parameters such as Tempo and Transpose. Simply press the

appropriate button (ex., TEMPO [+]), then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to set the value, then press [ENTER] to

close the window.

[DATA ENTRY] dial and [ENTER] button

Rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to

move the cursor.

Press the [ENTER] button to actu-

ally select the highlighted file.

Rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust

the selected parameter.

Select the desired parameter with the appropriate

[1 ] – [8 ] button.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 21

Basic Operations

A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the

message appears, simply press the appropriate button.

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single

additional button press.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.

A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button.

2 Press the button (or move the wheel or connected pedal)

corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up

that display.

For example, pressing the [GUIDE] button calls up the display in which the

Guide mode can be set.

Refer to the Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the

Direct Access function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See

page 7.)

[EXIT] button

Pressing the [EXIT] button returns you to the previously indicated display.

Pressing the [EXIT] button several times returns to the default Main display

(page 22).

Messages Shown in the Display

Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access

22 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

The display that appears when the power is turned on is the Main display. The Main display shows the current basic

settings such as the currently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main

display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard.

Song name and related information

Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. Pressing

the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 54).

Bar/Beat/Tempo

Displays the current position (bar/beat/tempo) in Style playback or Song

playback.

Current chord name

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, the chord specified in the chord section

of the keyboard will be displayed. When the Song containing the chord data is

played, the current chord name will be displayed.

Transpose

Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 38).

Upper Octave

Displays the amount that the octave value is shifted (page 38).

Style name and related information

Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing

the [E] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 43).

Voice name

Displays the Voice names currently selected for RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT

parts (page 35). Pressing one of the [F] – [H] buttons calls up the Voice

Selection display for each part.

Multi Pad Bank name

Displays the names of the selected Multi Pad Bank. Pressing the [I] button calls

up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 69).

Main Display Configuration

NOTE

Here’s a convenient way to return to the

Main display from any other display:

Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS]

button, then the [EXIT] button.

NOTE

When the Left Hold function (page 35)

is on, an “H” indication appears next to

the part name.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 23

Basic Operations

Registration Memory Bank name

Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name and

Registration Memory number. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration

Memory Bank Selection display (page 80).

Volume Balance

Displays the volume balance among the parts in two pages. Adjust the volume

balance among the parts by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons (page 53).

USB Audio information

Displays information for the selected audio file (elapsed playback time, file

name and repeat mode). When the recording of USB Audio is in standby, a

“REC WAIT” indication appears. While recording, “REC” appears.

Registration Sequence

Indicates the sequence order of the Registration Memory (page 79) numbers,

which can be called up via the TAB [E][F] buttons or the pedal. For

instructions on programming the sequence, refer to the Reference Manual on

the website.

Split Point

Displays the Split Point positions (page 35).

MIC Input level indicator (PSR-S950)

When a microphone is connected, this indicates the input level. Adjust the level

with the [INPUT VOLUME] knob so that the indicator lights in green or

yellow (but not in red). For details on the [INPUT VOLUME], refer to page 83.

Pressing the [B]/[C]/[D] buttons calls up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection

display.

NOTE

If the Volume Balance display is not

shown, press the [BALANCE] button to

show the Volume Balance display.

24 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

The File Selection display is for selecting Voice, Styles, and other data. The File Selection display appears when

you press one of the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons, SONG [SELECT] button, etc.

Location (drive) of data

PRESET Location where pre-programmed (preset) data is stored.

USER Location where recorded or edited data is saved. Installed

Expansion Voices or Styles are also saved here in the Expan-

sion folder.

USB Location where data on USB flash memory is saved. This

appears only when USB flash memory is connected to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal (page 92).

File Selection Display Configuration

SONG

[SELECT]

button

REGIST BANK

[SELECT] buttons

MULTI PAD CONTROL

[SELECT] button

STYLE category

selection buttons

VOICE category

selection buttons

NOTE

By pressing the [USB] button, you can

also access the files of Voice, Styles,

and other data which are saved in the

USB flash memory.

[USB]  [A] SONG/[B] AUDIO/[C]

STYLE/[F] VOICE(RIGHT1)/[G] MULTI

PAD/[H] REGIST.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 25

Basic Operations

Selectable data (files)

The files that can be selected on this display are shown. If more than 10 files

exist, the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) are shown below the files. Pressing the

corresponding button changes the display page. When other pages follow, the

“Next” button appears, and for the previous page, the “Prev.” button appears.

File/folder operation menu

You can save and manage your data files (copy, move, delete, etc.) from this

menu. For detailed instructions, refer to pages 26 – 29.

NOTE

The data, both pre-programmed and

your own original, are saved as “files.”

NOTE

The number of pages shown varies

depending on the Selection display.

Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder

In the PRESET display, several data (files) are contained together in a folder. You can also organize your

original data in the USER/USB display by creating several new folders (page 27).

To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8 ] (UP) button.

Example: PRESET Voice Selection display

The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

This display shows the Voice

files in a folder.

The next highest level — in this case,

folder — is shown. Each folder

shown in this display contains appro-

priately categorized Voices.

26 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can save your original data (such as Songs you’ve recorded and Voices you’ve edited) as a file to internal

memory (User drive) or a USB flash memory. If you’ve saved a lot of files, it may be difficult to find the desired file

quickly. To make it easier to find the files you want, you can organize your files in folders, rename the files, delete

unnecessary files, etc. These operations are done in the File Selection display.

This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs you’ve recorded and Voices you’ve edited) as a file.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB

[E][F] buttons.

2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button.

The naming display is called up.

3 Enter the file name (page 30).

Even if you skip this step, you can rename the file at any time after saving it

(page 28).

4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file.

The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among

the files in alphabetical order.

File Management

IMPORTANT

• Saving files or creating new folders cannot be done in the PRESET tab or the Expansion folder (installed Expansion Pack) in the USER tab.

• Files in the PRESET tab and the Expansion folder in the USER tab cannot be renamed/moved/deleted.

• Files in the Expansion folder in the USER tab cannot be copied.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92.

Saving a File

NOTE

If you want to cancel the Save opera-

tion, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 27

Basic Operations

This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and

organized as desired, making it easier to find and select your original data.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) to which you want to create a new folder by using the TAB

[E][F] buttons.

If you want to create a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder

here first.

2 Press the [7 ] (FOLDER) button.

The naming display for a new folder is called up.

3 Input the name of the new folder (see page 30).

Creating a New Folder

NOTE

The maximum number of files/folders

which can be saved in a folder is 500.

NOTE

In the USER tab display, folder directo-

ries can contain up to four levels. The

maximum total number of files/folders

which can be saved differs depending

on the file size and the length of the

file/folder names.

NOTE

If you want to cancel to create a new

folder, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

NOTICE

Name the folder to something

other than “Expansion.” Other-

wise, all data contained in the

“Expansion” folder will be lost

when an Expansion Pack is

installed.

28 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

This operation lets you rename files/folders.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) which contains the file/folder you want to rename by using

the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Press the [1 ] (NAME) button.

The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

4 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

The naming display is called up.

5 Input the name (characters) of the selected file or folder

(page 30).

The renamed file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the files in alphabetical order.

This operation lets you copy or cut a file (or files) and paste it/them to another location (folder). You can also copy

folders (but not move them) by using the same procedure.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) which contains the file/folder you want to copy by using

the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Press the [3 ] (COPY) button to copy or [2 ] (CUT) to move.

The pop-up window for the Copy/Cut operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

Renaming a File/Folder

NOTE

To cancel the Rename operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

NOTICE

Name the folder to something

other than “Expansion.” Other-

wise, all files contained in the

“Expansion” folder will be lost

when an Expansion Pack is

installed.

Copying or Moving Files

NOTE

• Protected Songs which are saved to

the User drive are marked by a

“Prot. 1” indication at the upper left

side of the file names and cannot be

copied/moved to USB flash memo-

ries.

• Commercially available song data

may be copy protected to prevent

illegal copying.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 29

Basic Operations

3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again.

Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current

display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL

OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

5 Select the destination tab (USER or USB) to paste the file/folder,

by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

If necessary, select the destination folder by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

6 Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder selected

in step 3.

The pasted file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among

the files in alphabetical order.

This operation lets you delete individual or multiple files/folders.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) which contains the file/folder you want to delete by using

the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Press the [5 ] (DELETE) button.

The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again.

Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current

display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL

OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

5 Follow the on-display instructions.

• YES Delete the file/folder

• YES ALL Delete all selected files/folders

• NO Leave the file/folder as is without deleting

• CANCEL Cancel the Delete operation

NOTE

To cancel the Copy operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

Deleting Files/Folders

NOTE

To cancel the Delete operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

30 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters for naming your files/folders, inputting keywords to

search for the appropriate panel settings (Music Finder), etc. Entering characters should be done in the display

shown below.

1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1 ] button.

• CASE Capital letters, numbers, marks

• case Lowercase letters, numbers, marks

2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired

position.

3 Press the [2 ] – [6 ] and [7 ] buttons, corresponding to

the character you wish to enter.

To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-

input button. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the character will be

entered automatically.

For details on entering characters, refer to “Other character-entry operations”

below.

4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and

return to the previous display.

• Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA ENTRY]

dial, and press the [7 ] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at

once, press and hold the [7 ] (DELETE) button.

• Entering marks or space

1. Press the [6 ] (SYMBOL) button to call up the mark list.

2. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark or space,

then press the [8 ] (OK) button.

• Selecting custom icons for files (shown at left of file name)

1. Press the [1 ] (ICON) button to call up the ICON SELECT display.

2. Select the icon by using the [A] – [J] buttons, [3 ] – [5 ] buttons or

[DATA ENTRY] dial. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB

[E][F] buttons to select different pages.

3. Press the [8 ] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

Entering Characters

Several different characters are

assigned to each button, and the

characters change each time

you press the button.

NOTE

When inputting lyrics in the Song Cre-

ator function, you may also enter Japa-

nese characters (kana and kanji).

NOTE

The following marks cannot be entered

for a file/folder name.

\ / : * ? " < > |

NOTE

The file name can contain up to 41

characters and the folder name can

contain up to 50 characters.

NOTE

To cancel the character-entering oper-

ation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

Other character-entry operations

NOTE

To cancel the operation, press the

[8 ] (CANCEL) button.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 31

Basic Operations

While holding the C6 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the power switch on. This resets all settings to the

factory default.

You can also reset a specified setting to the factory default value. Call up the

operation display: [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM

RESET. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11.

This procedure backs up all data saved in USER drive (except Protected Songs and

Expansion Voices/Styles) and all settings of the instrument to a USB flash memory.

Yamaha recommends that you back up important data to a USB flash memory since

the data in the instrument may be lost on occasion through malfunction or incorrect

operation.

1 Connect the backup USB flash memory (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER

3 Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the data to the USB flash

memory.

You can also back up a specified setting. Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM RESET. For details,

refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11.

Restoring the Data:

You can restore the data by pressing the [E] (RESTORE) button in the Owner page

of the UTILITY display. When the operation is complete, the instrument will be

restarted automatically.

Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings

Data Backup

NOTICE

Move the Protected Songs which

are saved to the USER display

before restoring. If the Songs are

not moved, the operation deletes

the data.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

NOTE

Completing the backup/restore opera-

tion may take a few minutes.

NOTE

To save the Song, Style, Multi Pad,

Registration Memory Bank and Voice

independently, execute the Copy oper-

ation (page 28) from the File Selection

display.

32 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Voices

– Playing the keyboard –

The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic

instrumental Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, brass, wind

instruments and more.

1 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button.

2 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button to turn on the Right 1

part.

3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a

Voice category and call up the Voice Selection display.

The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice

category selection buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the

preset Voices. For example, press the [STRINGS] button to display various

strings Voices.

Playing Preset Voices

Selecting a Voice (RIGHT 1) and playing the keyboard

IMPORTANT

For information on the keyboard

parts (Right 1, Right 2 and Left),

see page 35.

NOTE

The [EXPANSION/USER] button is

used for calling up Custom Voices

(your original Voices created with the

Voice Set function) or Expansion

Voices (additionally installed Voices).

For details on Expansion Voices, refer

to the section “Expanding Voices”

(page 36).

Percussion/Drum Voices

When one of the Voices is selected from

this button, you can play various drums and

percussion instruments or SFX (sound

effects) sounds on the keyboard. Details

are given in the Drum List provided in the

Data List on the website.

Preset Voices

Organ Flutes Voices (page 41)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 33

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

To call up the other display pages, press one of the [1 ] – [5 ] buttons or

press the same VOICE button again.

5 Play the keyboard.

1 Select a Voice for the Right 1 part (page 32).

2 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button.

3 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button to turn on the Right 2

part.

NOTE

If you pressed the [ORGAN FLUTES]

button in step 2, press the [I] (PRE-

SET) button before proceeding to step

NOTE

The Voice type and its defining charac-

teristics are indicated above the Preset

Voice name. For details on the charac-

teristics, refer to the Reference Manual

on the website.

NOTE

You can call up the information for the

selected Voice by pressing the [7 ]

(INFO.) button. (Some Voices do not

have an information display.) To close

the information display, press the

[EXIT] button.

To listen to the demo phrases for each Voice

Press the [8 ] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the demo, press the [8 ]

button again.

Recalling your favorite Voices easily

The sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first. By copying your favorite Preset Voices to the

USER drive, you can quickly and easily recall them as needed.

1. Copy your favorite Voice from the Preset drive to the User drive. Refer to page 28 for details on the copy oper-

ation.

2. Press the [EXPANSION/USER] button to call up the User drive of the Voice Selection display, then press one

of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

34 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

4 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the

Voice Selection display for the Right 2 part.

5 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

6 Play the keyboard.

The Voice selected for RIGHT 1 and the Voice selected here are sounded

simultaneously in a layer.

1 Make sure that the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] and/or [RIGHT 2]

buttons are turned on.

2 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn it on.

3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the

Voice Selection display for the Left part.

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

5 Play the keyboard.

The notes you play with your left hand sound one Voice (LEFT Voice selected

above), while the notes you play with your right sound a different Voice or

Voices (RIGHT 1 and/or 2 Voices).

NOTE

You can save the settings to Registra-

tion Memory. See page 79.

Playing Different Voices with your Left and Right Hands

NOTE

You can save the settings to Registra-

tion Memory. See page 79.

RIGHT 2 part

RIGHT 1 part

LEFT part

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 35

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name — S.Art!, MegaVoice, Live!,

Cool!, Sweet!, etc. For detailed explanation, refer to the Reference Manual.

Keyboard Parts

Voices can be assigned independently to each of the three keyboard parts: Right 1, Right 2 and Left. You can

combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a rich, ensemble sound.

When the LEFT part is off, the RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices can be played over the entire keyboard. When the LEFT

part is on, keys lower than F#2 (the Split Point) are set for playing the LEFT part and those higher than the Split

Point are set for playing the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts.

You can confirm the currently selected part by checking which lamp of the PART SELECT buttons is lit. To

select the desired keyboard part, press the corresponding part button.

NOTE

To change the Split Point, press: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] SPLIT POINT. For more information,

refer to the Reference Manual on the website, chapter 2.

Upper section of the

keyboard

Lower section of the

keyboard

Split Point (F#2)

Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold)

By turning on the PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLD] button, the LEFT part Voice is held even when the keys are

released, desirable in some performance styles. Non-decaying Voices such as strings are held continuously, while

decay-type Voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).

Voice Characteristics

36 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Installing an Expansion Pack lets you add a variety of optional Voices and Styles to each Expansion category. The

installed Voices and Styles can be selected like Preset Voices and Styles, allowing you to expand your music

performance and creation possibilities.

For information on obtaining Expansion Packs, refer to the PSR-S950 or PSR-S750 page at the Yamaha website

(http://www.yamaha.com/). Depending on your locale, Expansion Packs may be available for expanding Voices and

Styles unique or native to your particular area.

1 Connect the USB flash memory which contains the Expansion

Pack file to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [J] EXPANSION PACK INSTALLATION  TAB [E][F]

USB

3 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Expansion Pack

file.

4 Press the [6 ] (INSTALL) button to install the data to the

instrument.

Follow the on-display instructions.

5 Press the [F] (YES) button when the message indicating

completion of the install operation appears.

The instrument will be restarted automatically.

6 Press the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE or STYLE

category selection buttons to see if the Expansion Pack data

has been installed successfully.

Expansion Voices or Styles can be found in the Expansion folder of the USER

tab display.

Expanding Voices

Installing an Expansion Pack

NOTICE

This instrument allows you to

install only one Expansion Pack.

Installing an Expansion Pack will

erase all the previously existing

Expansion Pack data in the

instrument. Make sure to keep a

copy of the Expansion Pack data

in a USB flash memory for future

use.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

NOTE

You can call up the information for the

selected Expansion Pack by pressing

the [7 ] (INFO.) button. To close the

information display, press the [EXIT]

button.

NOTICE

The instrument will be restarted

when installation is completed.

Save all the data currently being

edited beforehand, otherwise

the data will be lost.

NOTE

If a message appears indicating that

the drive does not have enough free

space, move the files in the USER tab

to the USB tab, then try installing

again. Refer to page 28 for details on

the Move operations.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 37

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

This operation deletes all the installed Expansion Voices or Styles.

1 Call up the operation display then select an Expansion Pack

file.

[FUNCTION]  [J] EXPANSION PACK INSTALLATION  TAB [E][F]

USER

2 Press the [5 ] (UNINSTALL) button to uninstall the Expansion

Pack.

Follow the on-display instructions.

3 Press the [F] (YES) button when the message indicating

completion of the uninstall operation appears.

The instrument will be restarted automatically.

Song, Style or Registration Memory containing Expansion Voices or Styles

Song, Style or Registration Memory containing any Expansion Voices or Styles will not sound properly or cannot

be called up, if the Expansion Pack data does not exist in the instrument.

We recommend that you write down the name of the Expansion Pack when you create the data (Song, Style or

Registration Memory) using Expansion Voices or Styles, so that you can easily find and install the Expansion

Pack when necessary.

Uninstalling an Expansion Pack

NOTICE

The instrument will be restarted

when the uninstallation opera-

tion is completed. Save all data

currently being edited before-

hand, otherwise the data will be

lost.

38 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons transpose the overall pitch of the instrument (the

keyboard sound, Style playback, Song playback, and so on) in semitone steps. Press

the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the transpose value to 0.

The UPPER OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons allow the pitch of the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts to

be shifted up or down by one octave. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the octave value to 0.

Transposing the Pitch of the Keyboard

NOTE

The Transpose functions do not affect

the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices.

NOTE

You can also adjust the pitch for each

part in the Mixing Console display

called up via [MIXING CONSOLE] 

TAB [E][F] TUNE [1 ] –

[3 ] TRANSPOSE.

Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument

Although the entire pitch of this instrument is set to 440.0 Hz by default, you can fine-tune the pitch from

[FUNCTION] [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [E][F] MASTER TUNE.

You can also adjust the pitch for each part (keyboard parts, Style parts and Song parts) on the TUNE page of the

Mixing Console display (page 86).

For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Fine-tuning the pitch for each note individually

Although the scale of this instrument is set to Equal Temperament by default, you can change the scale or fine-tune the

pitch for each note from [FUNCTION] [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [E][F] SCALE TUNE.

For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 39

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

Use the PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or

down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is

applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The PITCH BEND wheel

is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released.

The maximum pitch bend range can be changed on the Mixing Console display:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] TUNE  [H] PITCH BEND RANGE.

The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. By

default, this is applied to the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the

MODULATION wheel down (toward you) decreases the depth of the effect, while

moving it up (away from you) increases it.

You can set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be

applied or not to each of the keyboard part: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER

 TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 2 MODULATION WHEEL.

You can apply some effects to the keyboard performance. The effects can be turned on or off by using the following

buttons.

• HARMONY/ECHO

The Harmony/Echo effects are applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying

Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody” on page 40.

Using the Wheels

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel

NOTE

The effects caused by using the PITCH

BEND Wheel are not applied to the

rhythm parts of the Style.

Using the Modulation Wheel

NOTE

Depending on the selected Voice, the

MODULATION wheel effect is not

applied to the rhythm parts of the

Style.

NOTE

To avoid accidentally applying modu-

lation, make sure the MODULATION

Wheel is set at minimum (down) posi-

tion before you start playing.

NOTE

The effects caused by using the MOD-

ULATION wheel may not be applied to

the LEFT part during Style playback

depending on the Style setting.

Applying Voice Effects

These three effect systems are applied

to the currently selected keyboard part

(RIGHT 1, 2, or LEFT).

40 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

• TOUCH

This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When off, the same

volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

•SUSTAIN

When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard with right-hand

part (RIGHT 1 and 2) have a longer sustain.

•MONO

When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a

time). Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead sounds (such as brass

instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively control the Portamento

effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato.

When this button is off, the part’s Voice played polyphonically.

• DSP/DSP VARI.

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to

your music in a variety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like

you are playing in a concert hall.

The [DSP] button is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off

for the currently selected keyboard part.

Although many of the Voices have been automatically set to play the certain DSP

types to match the particular Voice, you can change the type. On the Voice Selection

display, select [6 ] (VOICE SET) TAB [ E][F] EFFECT/EQ  [A]/[B] 2 DSP.

For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

The [DSP VARI.] button is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. You

could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotating speed (slow/fast)

of the rotary speaker effect.

Among the Voice Effects, Harmony is one of the most impressive. When the Harmony/Echo is on, the Harmony

effect is applied to the right-hand Voices depending on the chord played with your left hand.

1 Turn the [HARMONY/ECHO] button on.

2 Turn on both the [ACMP] button and [SYNC START] button

(page 43) and make sure that the RIGHT 1 part is on (page 32).

3 Play a chord with your left hand to start the Style (page 44) and

play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard.

You can also use the Harmony effect with the Style stopped. Simply hold down a

chord with your left hand and play a melody with your right.

Although many of the Voices have been automatically set to play the certain

Harmony/Echo types to match the particular Voice, you can change the type via

[FUNCTION]  [G] (HARMONY/ECHO). For details, refer to the Reference

Manual on the website.

NOTE

Portamento is a function that creates a

smooth transition in pitch from the

first note played on the keyboard to the

next.

Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody (HARMONY/ECHO)

NOTE

Depending on the harmony/echo type,

harmony will be applied even when the

[ACMP] button is off.

In this example, harmony notes in the

scale of C major (the chord played in

the left hand) are automatically added

to the notes played in the right-hand

range of the keyboard.

Split Point

Chord section

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 41

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

You can create original Organ Flutes Voices by editing the Preset Organ Flutes

Voices. Just as on a traditional organ, the original Voices can be created by

increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages. The created Voices can be

saved and called up anytime.

1 Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button.

The FOOTAGE Page of the Voice Set display of the Organ Flutes Voice is

called up.

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the footage settings.

The footage settings determine the basic sound of the Organ Flutes.

The [1 ] buttons control two footages: 16’ and 5 1/3’. Pressing the [D]

button switches between these two footages.

If you want, you can select the Organ type, change the Rotary Speaker speed

and adjust the Vibrato setting, by using the [A] – [C] and [F] – [H] buttons.

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

NOTE

The term “footage” is a reference to the

sound generation of traditional pipe

organs, in which the sound is pro-

duced by pipes of different lengths (in

feet).

For details on the VOLUME/ATTACK Page and EFFECT/EQ

Page, see the Reference Manual on the website.

[A]/[B] ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated. Sine produces a clean,

clear sound and Vintage produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.

[C] ROTARY SP

SPEED

Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a

rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the

EFFECT/EQ Page), and the VOICE CONTROL [DSP] button is turned on.

[F]/[G] VIBRATO Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF.

[H] VIBRATO

DEPTH

Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels:

1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high).

[I] PRESETS Opens the File Selection display of the Organ Flutes Voices for selecting a preset

Organ Flutes Voice.

42 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

3 Press the [I] (PRESETS) button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice

Selection display.

Pressing the [6 ] button returns you to the Voice Set display.

4 Save your Organ Flutes Voice by following the procedure on

page 26.

NOTICE

The settings will be lost if you

select another Voice or turn the

power to the instrument off with-

out executing the Save opera-

tion.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 1.

Selecting GM/XG or other Voices from the

panel:

Voice Selection display  [8 ](UP)  [2 ] (P2)

Effect-related settings

• Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard:

[FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [ E][F] KEY-

BOARD/PANEL

• Selecting the Harmony/Echo type:

[FUNCTION]  [G] HARMONY/ECHO

Pitch-related settings

• Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument:

[FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB

[E][F] MASTER TUNE

•Scale Tuning:

[FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB

[E][F] SCALE TUNE

• Changing the part assignment of the TRANS-

POSE buttons:

[FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [ E][F] KEY-

BOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 3 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

Editing Voices (Voice Set):

Voice Selection display





] (VOICE SET)

Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets

(effects, etc.):

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE

SET  TA B [ E][F] VOICE SET

Editing Organ Flutes parameters:

[ORGAN FLUTES]  TAB [ E][F] VOLUME/ATTACK or

EFFECT/EQ

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 43

Styles

– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

The instrument features a variety of accompaniment and rhythmic

backing patterns (called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical

genres including pop, jazz, and many others. The Style features

Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic

accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your

left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full

band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by yourself.

1 Press one of the STYLE category selection buttons to call up

the Style Selection display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Style.

Pressing one of the [1 ] – [4 ] buttons or pressing the same STYLE button

again can call up the other display page.

3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment.

The specific left-hand section of the keyboard (page 35) becomes the Chord

section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as

a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected Style.

Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment

The [EXPANSION/USER] button can be used to easily

recall your favorite Styles and call up Expansion Styles

(additionally installed Styles). The operations of both are

the same as the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE

category selection buttons. For instructions, refer to the

section “Recalling your favorite Voices easily” (page 33)

and “Expanding Voices” (page 36).

44 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected

Style starts.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play melody with your right hand.

6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback.

NOTE

For information on chords and Chord

Fingering Type, see page 45.

NOTE

You can transpose the Style (accompa-

niment). See page 38.

Audio Styles (PSR-S950 only)

The +Audio Styles have been specially produced by adding audio recordings of studio musicians playing in various

recording studios worldwide. This adds all the natural feel, ambience and warmth to the drums and percussion of the

Style, giving your performance greater expressive potential. Specifically, it retains the subtle nuances and grooves that

are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum/percussion kit. Yamaha Time Stretch Technology allows the audio to

follow your tempo changes without changing pitch, so everything stays in perfect sync.

NOTE

• If the tempo is set to over 140% of the default, the audio part is muted.

• Keep in mind that the Audio Styles may take more time to load than others, and that they may have certain restrictions and differ in the specific functions that can be

handled.

In addition to Audio Styles, various other types of Style Characteristics are available. For details, refer to the Reference

Manual on the website.

140% of the default tempo

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 45

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

For users who are unfamiliar with chords, this handy chart features common chords for your quick reference. Since

there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord

books for further details.

 Indicates the root note.

Changing the Chord Fingering Type

By changing the chord fingering type, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment even if you don’t

press all of the notes which comprise a chord. Chord fingering type can be changed from: [FUNCTION]  [C]

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] CHORD FINGERING.

Following types can be selected, for example.

•Single Finger

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two or three

fingers.

• AI Full Keyboard

Playing just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands – like playing the piano – produces

appropriate accompaniment. You don’t have to worry about specifying the chords. (Depending on the song

arrangement, AI Full Keyboard may not always produce appropriate accompaniment.)

For other types, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Chords

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Major chord

Press the root key only.

Minor chord

Simultaneously press the

root key and a black key to

its left.

Seventh chord

Simultaneously press the

root key and a white key to

its left.

Minor seventh chord

Simultaneously press the root

key and both a white and

black key to its left.

46 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

• [START/STOP] button

The rhythm channels start playing back as soon as the [START/STOP] button is

pressed. To stop playback, press the button again.

• [SYNC START] button

This puts Style playback in standby. When [ACMP] is on, the Style starts playing

back by playing a chord with your left hand, and when [ACMP] is off, the Style

(only rhythm channels) starts playing back by pressing any note on the keyboard.

During Style playback, pressing this button stops playing and puts the playback in

standby.

• [SYNC STOP] button

This is effective only when the [ACMP] button is on. By pressing this button to

enable Sync Stop, the Style plays back only when you play keys in the chord section

of the keyboard.

• INTRO [I] – [III] buttons

The instrument features three different Intro sections to add an introduction to your

performance. After pressing one of the INTRO [I] – [III] buttons, start playback.

When the Intro finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main

section.

• ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons

The instrument features three different Ending sections to add an ending to your

performance. When you press one of the ENDING [I] – [III] buttons while Style is

playing back, the Style will automatically stop after the ending is played. You can

have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING

button once again, while the ending is playing.

Operating Style Playback

To Start/Stop Playing

NOTE

When the fingering mode is set to “Full

Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” Syn-

chro Stop cannot be turned on.

To change the fingering mode: [FUNC-

TION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT

POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB

[E][F] CHORD FINGERING.

NOTE

If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button

when the Style is playing, a fill-in

automatically plays before the END-

ING/rit [I].

About the lamp status of the section buttons (INTRO/MAIN VARIATION/BREAK/ENDING)

•Red: The section is currently selected.

• Red (flashing): The section will be played next, following the currently selected section.

* The Main [A] – [D] buttons also flash red during fill-in playback.

• Green: The section contains data but is not currently selected.

• Off: The section contains no data and cannot be played.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 47

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Each Style features four different Main sections, four Fill-in sections and a Break section. By using these sections

effectively, you can easily make your performance sound more dynamic and professional. The section can be freely

changed while the Style is playing back.

• MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons

Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Main

section (the button lights in red). Each is an accompaniment pattern of a few

measures and it plays indefinitely. Pressing the selected MAIN VARIATION button

again plays an appropriate fill-in pattern to spice up the rhythm and break the

repetition.

• [BREAK] button

This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment. Press the

[BREAK] button during Style playback. When the one-measure Break pattern

finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section.

• TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons

By pressing the TEMPO [-] or [+] button, you can decrease/increase the tempo over

a range of 5 – 500. While the TEMPO pop-up is shown on the display, you can also

use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value.

Pressing the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons simultaneously resets the tempo to the default

value.

• [TAP TEMPO] button

During Style playback, you can change the tempo by tapping the [TAP TEMPO]

button twice at the desired tempo.

When the Style is stopped, tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for a 4/4

time signature) starts Style playback at the tempo you tapped.

• [FADE IN/OUT] button

This produces smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting/stopping playback. Press

the [FADE IN/OUT] button when playback is stopped and press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback with a fade in. To stop playback with a fade out, press the

[FADE IN/OUT] button during playback.

Changing Pattern Variation (Sections) During Style Playback

Press the selected Main

section (lit in red) again.

The fill-in of the selected

Main section plays

(flashes in red).

AUTO FILL function

When the [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned on, pressing any of the

Main [A] – [D] buttons as you play automatically plays a fill-in section.

Adjusting the Tempo

NOTE

This operation is common for Song

playback (page 54).

In the case of Audio Styles (page 44),

the tempo of 140% of the default is

shown under the current tempo.

Fading In/Out

NOTE

This operation also applies to Song

playback (page 54).

48 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings for the currently

selected Style.

1 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display (steps

1 – 2 on page 43).

2 Press the [5 ] (REPERTOIRE) button.

Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in

the display.

3 Use the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons to select the desired panel

setting.

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (Repertoire)

We recommend that you import Music Finder Records before using the Repertoire function (page 73).

NOTE

The settings shown here are Music

Finder Records. You can choose addi-

tional settings by using the Music

Finder feature (page 73).

NOTE

Depending on the particular selected

Style, there may not be any panel set-

tings in the Repertoire function.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 49

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided

which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you.

1 Select a Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 43).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.

Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that

match the current Style, it also automatically turns on [ACMP] and [SYNC

START], so that you can immediately start playing the Style.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected

Style starts.

Each Style has four One Touch Setting setups. Press other ONE TOUCH

SETTING [1] – [4] buttons to try out other setups.

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting)

NOTE

You can also create your own One

Touch Setting setups. For details, refer

to the Reference Manual on the web-

site.

Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change

when you select a different Main section (A – D). The Main sections A, B, C and D correspond to One Touch

Settings 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. To use the OTS Link function, turn the [OTS LINK] button on.

NOTE

By the OTS LINK TIMING function, you can change the timing in which the One Touch Settings change along with MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] changes. Refer to

the Reference Manual on the website.

50 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to the currently selected Style.

1 In the Style Selection display, press the [7 ] (OTS INFO.)

button to call up the Information display.

2 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display.

This convenient function “recommends” optimum Styles for the song you want to perform, based on the rhythm

you play for one or two measures.

1 In the Style selection display (page 43), press the [8 ]

(RECOMMEND) button to call up the STYLE RECOMMENDER

display.

The keyboard is divided by B1 key into two sections as below.

The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat) are assigned to the left of the

B1 key while the Piano sound is assigned to the right.

Confirming the One Touch Setting contents

NOTE

You can also call up the Information

display by pressing the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button then pressing one of

the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4]

buttons.

Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 51

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

2 Use the Style Recommender function to find the Style.

2-1 Press the [J] (START) button sets the instrument to standby, waiting for

your playing, and simultaneously turns on the metronome.

Pressing the [J] button toggles between START and CANCEL.

2-2 Play the rhythm you have in mind on the Drum or Piano section for one or

two measures along with the metronome.

The timing at which you play the keys is analyzed over several seconds,

then playback of the most recommended Style starts. In addition, the

candidates of the other recommended Styles are listed in the display.

• Example 1: Play the following rhythm on the Piano section.

Bossa Nova or similar Styles may be listed in the display.

• Example 2: Play the following rhythm on the Drum section.

An 8-Beat rhythm or similar Styles may be listed in the display.

3 Select the desired Style from the list by using the [1 ] –

[6 ] buttons.

Listen to the Styles by changing the sections (page 47), playing the chord on the

Piano section and adjusting the tempo (page 47).

If the Style called up doesn’t match the song you want to play, press the [J]

(RETRY) buttons, then return to step 2-2.

4 When you’ve found a Style you’re satisfied with, press the

[7 ]/[8 ] (OK) button to exit from the Style Recommender

display.

The Voices assigned to the keyboard return to the Voices for Right 1, 2 and Left

as before.

5 Play the keyboard along with the Style you just found.

NOTE

To cancel the operation, press the

[J] (CANCEL) buttons.

Adjusting the tempo and beat of the metronome

The tempo can be adjusted by the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons, and the beat can

be set by pressing the [E] (METRONOME) button in the STYLE

RECOMMENDER display.

NOTE

The instrument only analyzes the tim-

ing of your keyboard play. Tempo,

pitches and note length are ignored.

Snare

Kick

NOTE

The Style is played back at the tempo

you set in step 2 (or 3), but it can be

adjusted.

52 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

A Style contains the following channels below. You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by

selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up

the CHANNEL ON/OFF (STYLE) displays. (The PSR-S750 has

only one display.)

On the PSR-S950, pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again calls up the

second CHANNEL ON/OFF page (STYLE 2/2).

2 Press the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

To listen to only one channel by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the

channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the

appropriate channel button again.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the CHANNEL ON/OFF display.

Turning Style Parts On/Off and Changing Voices

Style channels

• RHY1/2 (Rhythm 1/2): These are the basic parts of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.

• BASS: The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the Style.

• CHD1/2 (Chord 1/2): These are rhythmic chord backing parts, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices.

• PAD: This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc.

• PHR1/2 (Phrase1/2): These parts are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make

the accompaniment more interesting.

(PSR-S950)

• AUDIO: This is an audio part of the Audio Style (page 44).

NOTE

You can save the settings here to Reg-

istration Memory. See page 79.

Changing the Voice for each channel

If necessary, press the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to change the Voice for the corresponding channel.

The Voice Selection display is called up from which you can select the Voice to be used for the channel. See

page 32.

NOTE

The Audio channel does not have a Voice and, hence, cannot be changed.

NOTE

When the Main display is shown, the

CHANNEL ON/OFF display cannot be

closed.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 53

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

You can adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the BALANCE (1/2)

display.

2 Adjust the Style volume by using the [2 ] buttons and the

keyboard volume by using the [5 ] – [7 ] buttons.

Using the [1 ] – [7 ] buttons, you can adjust the volume of Song, Style,

Multi Pad, MIC (for the PSR-S950) and keyboard parts.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the BALANCE display.

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Style and Keyboard

NOTE

When the Main display is shown, the

BALANCE display cannot be closed.

NOTE

In the Mixing Console display, you can

adjust the volume for each Style part.

See page 87.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 2.

Selecting the Chord Fingering type:

[FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TA B [ E][F] CHORD FINGERING

Style playback related settings:

[FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TA B [ E][F] STYLE SETTING

Split Point settings:

[FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TA B [ E][F] SPLIT POINT

Memorizing the Original One Touch Setting:

[MEMORY] + ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4]

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator):

[FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [B] STYLE CRE-

ATO R

• Realtime Recording:

 TAB [E][F] BASIC

•Step Recording:

 TAB [E][F] EDIT  [G] STEP REC

• Style Assembly:

 TAB [E][F] ASSEMBLY

• Editing the rhythmic feel:

 TAB [E][F] GROOVE

• Editing data for each channel:

 TAB [E][F] CHANNEL

• Making Style File Format settings:

 TAB [E][F] PARAMETER

54 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Songs

– Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

For the PSR-S950/S750, “Song” refers to the MIDI songs which

include preset songs, commercially available MIDI format files,

etc. Not only can you play back a Song and listen to it, but you

can also play the keyboard along with Song playback and record

your own performance as a Song.

You can play back the following types of Songs.

• Preset Songs (in the PRESET Page of the Song Selection display)

• Your own recorded Songs (see page 60 for instructions on recording)

• Commercially available Song data: SMF (Standard MIDI File)

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection

display.

2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the

desired Song.

If you want to playback Song in the USB flash memory, connect the USB flash

memory containing MIDI Song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

beforehand.

3 Select the desired Song by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the

[ENTER] button to execute.

Playback of Songs

NOTE

For instructions on the playback of

audio songs (files), see page 64.

NOTE

For information on compatible data

formats, refer to page 6.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

NOTE

You can instantly jump back to the

Main display by double-clicking on

one of the [A] – [J] buttons.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 55

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

• Synchro Start .........You can start playback as soon as you start playing the key-

board. While playback is stopped, hold down the SONG [J]

(STOP) button and press the [

F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, hold down the SONG

[J] (STOP) button and press the [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE)

button once again.

• Pause........................Press the [

F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. Pressing it again

resumes Song playback from the current position.

• Rewind/Fast Forward

.....................................Press the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button once to move

back/forward one measure. Hold the [G] (REW) or [H]

(FF) button to scroll backward/forward continuously.

Queuing the next Song for playback

While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to

the next Song smoothly during live performance. Select the Song you want to play next in the Song Selection

display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding

Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [8 ] (NEXT CANCEL) button.

Operations During Playback

NOTE

You can adjust the Song volume bal-

ance between the Song and Keyboard.

See page 53. In the Mixing Console

display, you can adjust the volume for

each Song part. See page 87.

NOTE

You can also turn specific part(s) on or

off. See page 57.

56 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Pressing the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button calls up a pop-up window showing

the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number) in the display.

While the Song Position pop-up is shown on the display, you can also use the [DATA

ENTRY] dial to adjust the value.

• Adjusting the Tempo

Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 47.

• Fading In/Out

Same procedure as with Style. See page 47.

You can view the music notation (score) of the selected Song. We suggest that you

read through the music notation before starting to practice.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54).

2 Press the [SCORE] button to call up the Score display.

You can look through the entire notation by using the TAB [E][F] buttons

when the Song playback is stopped.

Upon starting playback, the “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating

the current position.

You can change the displayed notation style by using the [1 ] – [8 ]

buttons. For details, refer to the Reference manual on the website.

NOTE

Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed

marker in certain Song data, which

indicates a specific location in the

Song.

For Songs containing Phrase Marks

You can switch between BAR and PHRASE

MARK by pressing the [E] button.

For Songs not containing Phrase Marks

NOTE

You can transpose the Song playback.

See page 38.

Displaying Music Notation (Score)

NOTE

The instrument can display the music

notation of your recorded Songs.

NOTE

The instrument cannot display the

music notation of commercially-avail-

able music data excepting those data

that specifically allow score display.

NOTE

The displayed notation is generated by

the instrument based on the Song

data. As a result, it may not be exactly

the same as commercially available

sheet music of the same song —

especially when displaying notation of

complicated passages or many short

notes.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 57

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

When the selected Song contains lyrics data, you can view it on the instrument’s display during playback. Even if

the Song doesn’t contain lyrics data, you can view the lyrics on the display by loading the text file (.txt) created on

a computer via USB flash memory. Displaying text enables various useful possibilities, such as the showing of

lyrics, chord names, and text notes.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54).

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to call up the Lyrics display.

When the Song data contains lyrics data, the lyrics are shown on the display.

You can look through the entire lyrics by using the TAB [E][F] buttons when

the Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the color of the lyrics

changes, indicating the current position.

When you want to view the text file created on your computer, press the

[5 ]/[6 ] (TEXT FILE) button to select the desired text file, then press

the [1 ] (TEXT) button to display the selected file.

For more information about the Lyrics display, refer to the Reference manual on

the website.

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on

or off.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up

the CHANNEL ON/OFF (SONG) display.

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] button to turn each channel on or off.

If you want to play back only one particular channel (solo playback), press and

hold down one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channel to

SOLO. Only the selected channel is turned on and others are off. To cancel solo

playback, press the same button again.

Displaying Lyrics (Text)

NOTE

Information about Text File selection

can be memorized to the Registration

Memory (page 79).

NOTE

(PSR-S950) The Lyrics (text) can be

displayed on an external monitor. See

page 90.

Turning Song Channels On/Off

58 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can mute the right-hand part to try practicing the part. Here, the explanations apply when you practice the

right-hand part with Follow Lights of the Guide functions. In the Score display, Follow Lights indicates the notes

you should play. You can also practice at your own pace — since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes

correctly.

1 Select a Song and call up the Score display (page 56).

2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

3 Press the SONG [TR 1] button to mute the right-hand part.

The indicator of the [TR 1] button goes out. You can now play that part by

yourself.

4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

Practice the muted part while viewing the Score display.

After your practice, turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Practicing the Right-hand Part with Guide Functions

IMPORTANT

Usually, CH 1 is assigned to [TR

1] button, CH 2 is assigned to

[TR 2] button, and CH 3 – 16 are

assigned to the [EXTRA TR] but-

ton.

Other guide functions

There are additional functions in the Guide features, for practicing the timing of playing the keys (Any Key), for

Karaoke or for practicing a song at your own pace (Your Tempo).

[FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING  [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE

For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 59

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song.

This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases.

To repeat a Song, turn the [REPEAT] button on and playback the desired Song.

Turning the [REPEAT] button off cancels Repeat playback.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54).

2 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

3 Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated.

Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic

lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is

played back repeatedly.

4 To stop playback, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button.

The Song position will return to Point A.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

Repeat Playback

NOTE

You can play multiple Songs repeat-

edly: [FUNCTION] [B] SONG SET-

TING [H] REPEAT MODE.

Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

NOTE

Specifying only Point A results in

repeat playback between Point A and

the end of the Song.

NOTE

When you want to repeat from the top

of the song to the middle of the song:

1 Press the [REPEAT] button, then

start Song playback.

2 Press the [REPEAT] button again at

the ending point (B).

ABTop of the song End of the song

Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped

1. Press the [H] (FF) button to advance to the Point A location.

2. Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A.

3. Press the [H] (FF) button to advance to the Point B location.

4. Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B.

60 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can record your own performances and save them as a Song file to the USER

drive or USB flash memory. Two different recording methods are available: Quick

recording which lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance, and

Multi Track recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple

channels. And since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your Songs, too.

Quick Recording ..........see section below

You can record all parts of your performance at once or a specific part (right-

hand, lefthand or Style playback). This is also an effective practice tool,

allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you

are practicing.

Multi Track Recording ..........page 62

With this method, you can record data to each channel independently, one by

one. You can also freely change the channel/part assignments with the Multi

Track recording.

If you want to record on a USB flash memory, read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” (page 92) then follow the instructions below after connecting the USB

flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Before starting recording, make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance — selecting a Voice,

Style, etc.

1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button

simultaneously.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

2 Press the SONG [REC] button.

Recording Your Performance

NOTE

Audio data (the rhythm channels cre-

ated via the audio data of Audio Style,

Audio Link Multi Pad and audio

songs) cannot be recorded to the MIDI

Songs.

NOTE

For instructions on the recording of

audio songs (files), see page 67.

Quick Recording

NOTE

To cancel the recording, press the [J]

(STOP) button.

Recording a specific part

In place of step 2, pressing the SONG [TR1] (or [TR2]) button while holding the [REC] button enables you to

record only the right-hand (or left-hand) part.

Pressing the [EXTRA TR] button while holding the [REC] button enables recording of only Style playback.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 61

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

3 Start recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard,

start Style playback or start Multi Pad playback.

4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording.

5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the

recorded performance.

6 Save the recorded performance as a Song.

The recorded Song can be saved in the Song Selection display.

6-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

6-2 Select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the

Song by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

6-3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button.

The naming display is called up.

6-4 Enter the file name (page 30).

6-5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file.

NOTE

When recording without Style play-

back, turning the [METRONOME] on

makes your recording sessions much

more efficient. The Metronome tempo

can be adjusted by the TEMPO [-]/[+]

buttons.

IMPORTANT

For Quick Recording, each part

will be recorded to the following

channels.

Keyboard parts: Ch. 1-3

Multi Pad parts: Ch. 5-8

Style parts: Ch. 9-16

NOTE

For details on the saving operation,

refer to “Saving a File” on page 26.

NOTICE

The recorded Song will be lost if

you change to another Song or

you turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

NOTE

If you want to cancel the Save opera-

tion, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

62 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Before starting recording, make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance — selecting a Voice, Style, etc.

1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button

simultaneously.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

2 While holding down the SONG [REC] button, press the [1 ] –

] buttons to set the desired channels to “REC.”

If you want to record the Right 1 part to channel 1, for example, press the [1 ]

button while holding down the [REC] button to set the channel 1 to “REC.”

Then use the [C]/[D] buttons to select “RIGHT 1” in step 3.

3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to assign the desired part for the

channel to be recorded.

4 Start recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard,

start Style playback or start Multi Pad playback.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording.

6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the

recorded performance.

7 Re-select other channels and record other parts by repeating

the steps 2 to 6.

Multi Track Recording

NOTE

To cancel the recording, press the [J]

(STOP) button.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 63

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

8 Save the recorded performance as a Song.

The recorded Song can be saved in the Song Selection display.

8-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

8-2 Select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the

Song by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

8-3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button.

The naming display is called up.

8-4 Enter the file name (page 30).

8-5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file.

NOTE

For details on saving, refer to “Saving

a File” on page 26.

NOTICE

The recorded Song will be lost if

you change to another Song or

you turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

NOTE

If you want to cancel the Save opera-

tion, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 3.

Editing Music Notation settings:

[SCORE]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons

Editing Lyrics/Text display settings:

[LYRICS/TEXT]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons

Using the Auto Accompaniment features with

Song Playback:

[ACMP]  STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START]  SONG [J] +

[F/K]  STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

Song Playback related parameters:

[FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING

• Keyboard and vocal practice using the Guide

function:

 [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE

• Playing backing parts with the Performance

Assistant Technology:

 [8 ] P.A.T.

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator):

[FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [A] SONG CRE-

ATO R

• Recording melodies (Step Recording):

 TAB [E][F] 1-16

• Recording chords (Step Recording):

 TAB [E][F] CHORD

• Re-recording a specific section — Punch In/

Out:

 TAB [E][F] REC MODE

• Editing channel events:

 TAB [E][F] CHANNEL

• Editing chord events, notes, System Exclusive

events and lyrics:

 TAB [E][F] CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS

64 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

USB Audio

– Playback and Recording Audio Files –

The convenient USB Audio function allows you to play back

audio files (WAVE or MP3) saved to a USB flash memory

device — directly from the instrument. Moreover, since you can

record your performances and recordings as audio files (.wav) to

a USB flash memory device, it is possible to play back the files

on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own

CDs to enjoy as well.

Try playing back audio files from USB flash memory on this instrument.

File formats that can be played back

1 Connect the USB flash memory containing the audio files to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display.

3 Press the [H] (FILE) button to display the audio files saved to the

connected USB flash memory.

Playing Back Audio Files

NOTE

The audio files take a slightly longer

time to load than other files.

NOTE

While selecting the desired WAVE file

in the Audio Link function (step 6 on

page 71), the [USB AUDIO PLAYER]

button does not function.

NOTE

For instructions on the playback of

MIDI songs, see page 54.

NOTE

DRM (Digital Rights Management)

protected files cannot be played back.

.wav 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo PSR-S950

PSR-S750

.mp3

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64 – 320 kbps and

variable bit rate, mono/stereo

PSR-S950

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 65

USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files –

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the file you

want to listen to.

5 Press the [8 ] (AUDIO PLAY) button to start playback.

The display automatically returns to the USB AUDIO PLAYER display.

6 To stop playback, press the [2 ] (STOP) button.

NOTICE

Never attempt to disconnect the

USB flash memory or turn the

power off during playback. Doing

so may corrupt the USB flash

memory data.

66 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operations via the number [] buttons

A-B Repeat Playback via the [C] (A B) button

The specified section (between the A and B points) can be played back repeatedly.

1. To set the A point, press the [C] button when playback reaches to the desired point.

The time set as the A point is shown in at “A [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the first wedge mark in

the playback progress bar.

2. To set the B point, press the [C] button again when playback reaches to the desired point.

The time set as the B point is shown in at “B [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the second wedge mark

in the playback progress bar.

The specified A-B section of the audio file will now play back repeatedly.

3. To cancel Repeat playback, press the [C] button again.

Repeat Playback mode via the [D] (REPEAT MODE) button

• OFF Plays through the selected file, then stops.

• SINGLE Plays through the selected file repeatedly.

• ALL Continues playback through all the files in the current folder repeatedly.

• RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all files in the current folder.

Playback-related Operations

[3 ] PLAY/PAUSE Starts or pauses playback at the current position.

[2 ] STOP Stops playback.

[4 ] PREV. Pressing this changes the file to the previous one; holding it moves continuously back

through the current file (in seconds).

[5 ] NEXT Pressing this changes the file to the next one; holding it moves continuously forward

through the current file (in seconds).

[6 ]

(PSR-S950)

AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current audio file.

[8 ]

(PSR-S750)

Total playback timeElapsed playback time

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 67

USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files –

Advanced Features only for PSR-S950

Try recording your performance as audio data (WAVE file) to a USB flash memory.

Sounds that can be recorded:

• Sounds that are generated via all the keyboard parts, Song parts, Style parts, and

Multi Pad parts.

• Sounds of the portable audio player that are input via the [AUX IN] jack.

• (PSR‐S950) Sounds that are input via the [MIC/LINE IN] jack, such as a

microphone, guitar or other audio devices.

Maximum amount of recording time:

• 80 minutes per recording, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the

USB flash memory.

The recorded data using this function is saved as:

• Stereo WAVE data

• 44.1 kHz sample rate/16 bit resolution

1 Connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

[7] TIME STRETCH Adjusts the playback speed by stretching/compressing the audio, compared to an original

speed of 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo.

NOTE

• The value can be adjusted from 70% to 140%.

• Time Stretch cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate.

[8] PITCH SHIFT Shifts the key in semitones.

NOTE

Pitch Shift cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate.

[H] VOCAL CANCEL Cancels or attenuates the center position of the stereo sound.

This lets you sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing, since the vocal sound is

usually at the center of the stereo image in most recordings.

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Song (MIDI) and Audio Song

Pressing the [BALANCE] button once or twice calls up the BALANCE (2/2) display. In this display, you can

adjust the volume balance between the Song (MIDI) and Audio Song by using the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons.

When this is set to CENTER, the levels of the Song and Audio Song are equal. To instantly reset the balance to

CENTER, press the [2 ] and [3 ] buttons simultaneously.

BALANCE (2/2)

Recording Your Performance as Audio

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

NOTE

Data that cannot be recorded includes:

Audio Styles, Songs protected by

Audio Link Multi Pads and the metro-

nome sound.

NOTE

For instructions on MIDI recording,

see page 60.

68 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

2 Set the desired Voice, etc. which you want to use for your

performance.

3 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display.

4 Press the [1 ] (REC) button to enter recording standby.

The [PLAY/PAUSE] button flashes.

5 Start recording by pressing the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) button,

then start your performance.

The elapsed recording time is shown in the display while recording.

6 Stop recording by pressing the [2 ] (STOP) button.

Recorded data is automatically saved to the USB flash memory as a file with the

name automatically set.

7 Press the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the

recorded performance.

To see the file of the recorded performance in the File Selection display, press

the [H] (FILE) button.

NOTE

The USB flash memory of “USB1” is

selected as the recording destination

when multiple USB flash memories are

connected.

Recordable time

NOTICE

Never attempt to disconnect the

USB flash memory or turn the

power off during recording.

Doing so may corrupt the USB

flash memory data or the record-

ing data.

Elapsed recording time

NOTE

The recording operation continues,

even if you close the USB AUDIO

PLAYER display by pushing the [EXIT]

button. Press the [USB AUDIO

PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display again, then

stop the recording by pressing the [2

] (STOP) button.

NOTE

Even if you make a mistake in your

performance, you cannot overwrite an

existing file. Delete the recorded file on

the File Selection display, then record

your performance again.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 69

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

Multi Pads

– Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-

recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to

add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.

Multi Pads are grouped in Banks of four each. The instrument

features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different

musical genres.Moreover, the Multi Pad Audio Link function

allows you to create a new pad with your WAVE data (Audio

data) to play back during your performance.

1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the

Multi Pad Bank Selection display, then select the desired bank.

Select pages using the [1 ] – [6 ] buttons that correspond to “P1, P2...” in the

display or pressing the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button repeatedly,

then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired bank.

2 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons to play a

Multi Pad phrase.

The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 1) starts playing back in its

entirety at the currently set tempo. You can even play two or more Multi Pads at

the same time.

3 Press the [STOP] button to stop playback of the Multi Pad(s).

If you want to stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button

and press the pad(s) you wish to stop.

Playing the Multi Pads

NOTE

There are two types of Multi Pad data.

Some types will play back once and

stop when they reach to the end. Oth-

ers will be played back repeatedly

(loop).

NOTE

Pressing the pad during its playback

will stop playing and begin playing

from the top again.

About the color of the Multi Pads

• Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase).

• Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back.

•

Red (flashing):

Indicates that the corresponding pad is in standby (Synchro Start).

70 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can start the Multi Pad playback by playing any key or by starting Style playback.

1 While holding the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button,

press the desired button or buttons from [1] – [4].

The corresponding buttons flash, indicating the Standby status.

To cancel this status, execute the same operation, or press only the [STOP]

button to cancel the Standby status of all Pads.

2 Start playback of the Multi Pad.

• When [ACMP] is off, press any note, or play back a Style.

• When [ACMP] is on, play a chord with your left hand, or play back a Style.

• When two or more Multi Pads are pressed in step 1, press any of them to start

playback of them simultaneously.

If you execute step 1 during playback of Style or Song:

To start playback of the corresponding Pad at the top of the next bar, press any

note (when [ACMP] is off) or play a chord with your left hand (when [ACMP]

is on).

Many of the Multi Pad phrases are melodic or chordal and you can have these phrases automatically change chords

along with the chords you play with your left hand. When the [ACMP] is on or LEFT part is on, simply play a chord

with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads — Chord Match changes the pitch to match the chords you play.

Keep in mind that some Multi Pads are not affected by Chord Match.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try out other various

chord types while playing the Multi Pads.

Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function

Using Chord Match

Chord Section

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 71

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

You can use WAVE files, created via the USB Audio function (page 67) or

commercially-available ones for the Multi Pad playback. To do this, you need to

create an Audio Link Multi Pad by linking the WAVE files to each of the Multi Pads.

1 Prepare the WAVE files in the USB flash memory.

2 Connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

3 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the

Multi Pad Bank Selection display.

4 Press the [7 ] (AUDIO LINK) button to call up the Multi Pad

Audio Link display.

5 Select the desired Pad by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and

[G] buttons.

The WAVE display appears.

6 Select the desired WAVE file by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

To confirm the information of the selected WAVE file:

Press the [7 ] (INFO.) button to call up the information window. You can

confirm the information (file name, title name, time and sample rate, etc.). Press

the [F] (OK) button to close it.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Multi Pad Audio Link

display.

Using WAVE Files for the Multi Pads

NOTE

Audio Link Multi Pads are neither cre-

ated nor played back during playback,

recording standby or recording of

audio files. For details on the audio

files, see page 64.

Creating an Audio Link Multi Pad

NOTE

You will need to press the [C] (NEW

BANK) button in the Multi Pad Audio

Link display to create an Audio Pad, if

an Audio Link Multi Pad has been

selected when you pressed the [7 ]

(AUDIO LINK) button. Otherwise, you

are simply re-selecting the link in the

selected Audio Link Multi Pad.

NOTE

A WAVE file cannot be linked to a MIDI

Multi Pad.

72 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

8 If desired, adjust the level of each WAVE file by using the

[1 ] – [4 ] buttons.

You can adjust the volume while playing a Multi Pad phrase by pressing the

corresponding MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons.

To confirm the path of the selected WAVE file:

Press the [H] (INFO.) button to call up the information window. Press the [F]

(OK) button to close it.

9 If you want to link other WAVE files to other pads, repeat steps 5

to 8.

10 Save the settings as a Multi Pad Bank.

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display,

then execute the Save operation. The Link and Volume settings will be saved.

11 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Multi Pad Audio Link

display.

The newly created Audio Link Multi Pad is marked with “Audio Link” at the

upper left of the file name.

If you want to change the Link setting:

Select the desired Audio Link Multi Pad, then execute the same operations as

steps 4 to 11.

You can play the Multi Pad to which the WAVE file is assigned by selecting them in

the USER or USB page of the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. Although you can

play via the same operations in page 69, note the following limitations.

• Make sure to connect the USB flash memory including the corresponding WAVE

files.

• Automatic repeat playback is not available.

• Only one Pad can be played back at once.

• Chord Match cannot be applied.

NOTICE

The setting will be lost if you

select another Audio Link Multi

Pad or turn the power to the

instrument off without executing

the Save operation.

Playing the Audio Link Multi Pads

NOTE

Audio files (WAVE files) take a slightly

longer time than MIDI files to load.

NOTE

When the link to the WAVE file is cut

(for example, when not connecting the

USB flash memory which includes the

corresponding WAVE files, etc.), a

“Not Found!” is indicated above the

Pad name.

NOTE

The lamp is off when the correspond-

ing pad contains no data (phrase).

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 5.

Multi Pad creating (Multi Pad Creator):

[FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [C] MULTI PAD

CREATOR

Multi Pad editing:

Multi Pad Bank Selection display  [8 ] (EDIT)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 73

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

Music Finder

– Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

This feature lets you call up the panel settings ideal for your

performance simply by selecting a “Record,” music genre or

song title. If you want to play in a certain genre of music but

don't know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate,

use this convenient function.

Moreover, by registering the Song, audio and Style file saved in

various locations into Music Finder, the instrument can easily

call up the desired Song, audio and Style file from the

corresponding Record.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

NOTICE

Loading the panel settings to the

instrument automatically over-

writes all your records (panel

settings, Song, audio and Style

files shown in the MUSIC

FINDER display). Make sure that

all important data has been

saved to the USER or USB in the

File Section display (as

described in step 4 above).

Loading panel settings (Records)

As a factory default, some sample records (panel settings) are provided in the Music

Finder. By downloading many panel settings from the Yamaha website and loading them

to the instrument, you can use the Music Finder function more conveniently and

effectively. Before using the Music Finder function, we recommend that you load the

panel settings by following the instructions below.

1. Download the Music Finder panel settings file from the website to the USB flash

memory.

http://download.yamaha.com/

2. Connect the USB flash memory which contains the panel settings file to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument.

3. Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

4. Press the [7 ] (FILES) button to call up the File Selection display.

74 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

NOTE

Even after replacing the Music Finder

records, you can reset them to their

original factory settings by selecting

the “MusicFinderPreset” file in PRE-

SET display of step 5.

5. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the USB display containing the panel settings

file downloaded from the website.

6. Press the button which corresponds to the file to display the message for selecting

REPLACE/APPEND of the panel settings.

7. Press the [F] (REPLACE) button to delete all records currently in the instrument and

replace them with the records of the selected file.

Press the [G] (YES) button at the confirmation prompt.

8. Press the [F] (YES) button in the message display (indicating completion of the

replace operation) to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

By checking the number of records in the MUSIC FINDER display, you can confirm

the record has been replaced.

The number of

records

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 75

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER

display.

In the ALL display, all the records are shown.

2 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Panel

Settings.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button.

Not only does this select the desired Panel Settings, it also automatically turns

on [ACMP] and [SYNC START].

3 Play chords in the left-hand section (page 35) of the keyboard to

start the Style.

Selecting a Record (Your Desired Music Genre)

Shows the song title

and information of the

Style assigned to the

panel settings.

Sorting the records

Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records by MUSIC, STYLE, BEAT and TEMPO. Press the [G]

(SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending).

When sorting records by MUSIC, you can use the [1 ] button to skip up or down through the songs

alphabetically. When sorting records by STYLE, you can use the [4 ]/[5 ] button to skip up or down

through the Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [] and [] buttons to move the cursor to the first

record.

NOTE

If you want to avoid changing the

Tempo during Style playback when

selecting another record, set the Style

Tempo function to LOCK or HOLD by

pressing the [I] (STYLE TEMPO) but-

ton in the Music Finder display. Set-

ting to LOCK can also avoid

inadvertent changing of the Tempo

while Style playback is stopped and

another record is selected.

76 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder.

1 From the ALL page of the MUSIC FINDER display, press the

[6 ] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display.

2 Enter the search criteria.

To cancel searching, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

3 Press the [8 ] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.

The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search.

Finding Your Desired Record (Panel Settings) via Search

NOTE

For instructions on entering charac-

ters, refer to page 30.

NOTE

You can search several different Key-

words simultaneously by inserting a

separator (comma) between each.

NOTE

If you select a beat of 2/4 or 6/8, a

Style suitable for performing a song in

2/4 and 6/8 beat can be searched, but

the actual Style is created by using a 4/

4 beat.

[A] MUSIC Searches by song name. Pressing the [A] button calls

up the pop-up window to enter the song name. To clear

the entered Music, press the [F] (CLEAR) button.

[B] KEYWORD Searches by keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up

the pop-up window to enter the keyword. To clear the

entered Keyword, press the [G] (CLEAR) button.

[C] STYLE Searches by Style. Pressing the [C] button calls up the

Style Selection display. After selecting the desired

Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the

Search display. To clear the entered Style, press the

[H] (CLEAR) button.

[D] BEAT Specifies the time signature for the search. All beat

settings are included in the search if you select ANY.

[E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location (the tab of the upper part of

the MUSIC FINDER display) for searching.

[1 ] ALL CLEAR Clears all entered search criteria.

[3 ] TEMPO FROM Sets a tempo range to which the search will be limited.

[4 ] TEMPO TO

[5 ]/

[6 ]

GENRE Selects the desired music genre.

NOTE

If you wish to search another criteria,

press the [6 ] (SEARCH 2) button in

the Music Finder display. The search

result is displayed in the SEARCH 2

display.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 77

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

By registering Song, audio or Style files in various locations (Preset, User and USB)

into Music Finder, the instrument can call up the file easily from the song title.

1 Call up the file.

For Song or Style files:

1-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] or one of the STYLE category selection

buttons to display the File Selection display.

1-2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the desired file.

For audio files:

1-1 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO

PLAYER display.

1-2 Press the [H] (FILE) button to display audio files in the connected USB

flash memory.

2 Press the [A] – [J] button corresponding to the desired file.

3 Press the [6 ] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file

to Music Finder.

The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display.

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File

NOTE

If you want to register files in the USB

flash memory, connect the USB flash

memory containing the data to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash memory, be

sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash

Memory” on page 92.

78 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to execute the registration.

Press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration.

5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC

column while (SONG), (AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in

the Style column.

You can recall the registered files in the same way as done in the “Selecting a Record

(Your Desired Music Genre)” (page 75) and “Finding Your Desired Record (Panel

Settings) via Search” (page 76).

• To play back the recalled Song file, press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE)

button in the SONG buttons or start playing the keyboard after selecting the SONG

record. You can stop playback by pressing the SONG [

J] (STOP) button.

• To play back the recalled audio file, press the [J] (F PLAY) button in the MUSIC

FINDER display after selecting the AUDIO record. You can stop playback by

pressing the [J] (J STOP) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.

• To play a Style, start playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with

your right hand. You can stop playback by pressing the STYLE CONTROL

[START/STOP] button.

Recalling the Registered File from Music Finder

NOTE

If you want to play back the files in the

USB flash memory, connect the USB

flash memory containing the data to

the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal before-

hand.

NOTE

When searching Song or audio

(page 76), it is necessary to set the

search criteria as follows.

STYLE: Blank

BEAT: ANY

TEMPO: “---” - “---”

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 6.

Creating a set of favorite Records:

[MUSIC FINDER]  TAB [ E][F] ALL  [H] ADD TO FAVOR-

ITE

Editing Records:

[MUSIC FINDER]  [8 ] (RECORD EDIT)

Saving the Record as a single file:

[MUSIC FINDER]  [7 ] (FILES)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 79

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or

“register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory

button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by

simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for

eight Registration Memory buttons should be saved as a single

Bank (file).

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so

on) as desired.

2 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY

section.

The display for selecting the items to be registered appears.

3 Determine the items you want to register.

Select the desired item by using the [2 ] – [7 ] buttons, then enter or

remove the checkmark by using the [8 ] (MARK ON)/[8 ] (MARK OFF)

buttons.

To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button.

Registering Your Panel Setups

NOTE

Refer to the Registration section of the

“Parameter Chart” in the Data List for

information on the parameters that are

contained in each item. The Data List

is available at the Yamaha website (See

page 7).

80 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

4 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons to

which you wish to memorize the panel setup.

The memorized button becomes red, which indicates the number button

contains data and its number is selected.

5 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating

steps 1 – 4.

The registered panel setups can be recalled by simply pressing the desired

number button.

You can save all eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

call up the Registration Bank Selection Display.

2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file.

For instructions on saving, refer to page 26.

NOTICE

If you select the button whose

lamp is lit in red or green here,

the panel setup previously mem-

orized to the button will be

erased and replaced by the new

settings.

About the lamp status

• Red: Data registered and currently selected

• Green: Data registered but not currently selected

• Off: No data registered

NOTE

The panel setups registered in the

numbered buttons are maintained even

when you turn off the power. If you

want to delete all the eight current

panel setups, turn the power on while

holding the B5 key (right-most B key

on the keyboard).

Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file

Bank 01

Bank 02

Bank 03

Bank 04

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 81

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

The saved Registration Memory Bank files can be recalled by using the REGIST

BANK [-]/[+] buttons or the following procedure.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select a Bank.

You can also use the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons, or the [DATA ENTRY]

dial and the [ENTER] button to select a Bank.

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) in the

Registration Memory section.

Recalling a Registered Panel Setup

NOTE

When recalling the setups including

file selection of Song, Style, text, etc.

from a USB flash memory, make sure

that the appropriate USB flash memory

including the registered Song/Style is

connected into the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

NOTE

Turning the [FREEZE] button on dis-

ables recall of specific item(s). To use

this function, you need to select the

item(s) not to be recalled by accessing

[FUNCTION] [E] REGIST

SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET 

TAB [E][F] FREEZE.

Confirming the Registration Memory Information

You can call up the information display to confirm which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons

of a Registration Memory Bank.

1. Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration Bank Selection dis-

play, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank.

2. Press the [7 ] (INFO.) button to call up the information display.

By using the TAB [E][F] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages: information

for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons.

3. Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display.

NOTE

If a certain Voice part is set to off, the Voice name for corresponding part is shown in gray (on the PSR-S950); on the PSR-S750, the Voice part name for

the corresponding part is shown in gray.

NOTE

If a certain Voice part is set to off, the Voice name for corresponding part is shown in gray (on the PSR-S950); on the PSR-S750, the Voice part name for

the corresponding part is shown in gray.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 7.

Disabling recall of specific items:

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE

SET  TA B [ E][F] FREEZE

Calling up Registration

Memory numbers in order:

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE

SET  TA B [ E][F] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

82 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Microphone

– Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing –

By connecting a microphone to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack (standard

1/4” phone jack), you can enjoy singing along with your keyboard

performance or with Song playback. The instrument outputs your

vocals through the built-in speakers. Moreover, you can

automatically apply various Vocal Harmony effects to your voice

as you sing.

1 Before turning on the power of the instrument, set the [INPUT

VOLUME] knob to the minimum position.

2 Connect the microphone to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack.

3 Set the [LINE MIC] switch to “MIC.”

4 Turn on the power of the instrument.

Connecting a Microphone

NOTE

Make sure you have a conventional

dynamic microphone.

NOTE

Always set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob

to minimum when nothing is con-

nected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack.

Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is highly

sensitive, it may pick up and produce

noise even when nothing is connected.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 83

Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing –

5 (If necessary, turn on the microphone.) Adjust the [INPUT

VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone.

Adjust the control while checking the SIGNAL lamp. Make sure to adjust the

control so the lamp lights in green. Make sure that the lamp does not light in

orange or red, since this indicates that the input level is too high.

6 At the bottom of the Main display, adjust the balance of the

microphone sound (MIC) with the instrument sound (page 53).

This section covers the Vocal Harmony Effects that can be applied to your voice via the microphone connected in

the previous instructions.

1 Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up

the Mic Setting/Vocal Harmony display.

2 Press the [D]/[E] (TYPE SELECT) buttons to call up the Vocal

Harmony Selection display.

3 Select a Vocal Harmony type by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ] –

[5 ] buttons.

Make sure lamp does

not light in orange or

red.

Disconnecting the microphone

1. Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position.

2. Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC/LINE IN] jack.

Applying the Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Voice

84 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

On the display, you can confirm that one of the three icons shown below is

assigned to each Vocal Harmony Type. Each of these icons indicates the

Harmony mode.

4 Follow the steps below, depending on which Type (and mode)

you selected.

If you selected the Chordal Vocal Harmony Type:

4-1 Turn the [ACMP] button on.

4-2 Play chords with your left hand, or play back the Song which contains

chord data.

Vocal harmonies based on the chords are applied to your singing.

If you selected the Vocoder or Vocoder Mono Vocal Harmony Type:

4-1 Call up the SETUP window in the display by pressing the [8 ] button.

Icon Mode Descriptions

(Microphone)

Chordal The harmony notes are determined by the chords

you play in the chord section (with [ACMP]

turned on), the left hand section (with [ACMP]

turned off and [LEFT] turned on) or the chord

data of a Song.

(Microphone with FX)

The harmony notes are determined in the same

way as in Microphone above. However, effects

such as Vocal Doubler and PokerPhaser are

applied. Harmony may or may not be applied

depending on the selected type. (If harmony is

not applied, the [I] (HARMONY) button in the

Mic Setting/Vocal Harmony display is set to OFF.

(Microphone and key-

board)

Vocoder The microphone sound is output via the notes

you play on the keyboard or via the Song play-

back notes.

Vocoder

Mono

Same as the Vocoder basically. In this mode,

only single-note melodies or lines can be played

back (with last-note priority).

NOTE

If you selected a Type having an “FX”

icon, your voice will be processed with

effects, but may not have harmonies

applied.

4-2

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 85

Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing –

4-2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to change the Keyboard setting (OFF,

UPPER, LOWER), if necessary.

Select UPPER to have the Vocoder effect applied by your right-hand-

played part, LOWER to have it applied by your left-hand-played part, and

OFF not to have any Vocoder effect by your keyboard playing. For more

information on the Keyboard setting to control the Vocoder effect, refer to

the Reference manual on the website.

4-3 Play melodies on the keyboard or play back a Song, and sing into the

microphone. You’ll notice that you don’t actually have to sing pitched

notes. The microphone sound is output via the notes or note you play on

the keyboard or Song playback.

NOTE

For Vocoder, the effect is applied to a

maximum of three notes of the chord

you play; for Vocoder-Mono, the effect

is only applied to a single note (last

note played).

Using the Talk function

Turning the Talk function on by pressing the [G] (TALK) button in the Mic Setting display lets you temporarily

cancel the microphone effects or vocal harmony. This is useful when you want to talk between songs during a

performance.

You can also change the Talk settings to suit your preferences. For details, refer to the Reference Manual.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 8.

Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control parame-

ters:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [D]/[E] (TYPE

SELECT)  [8 ] (SETUP)

Editing the Vocal Harmony Types:

• Editing the Overview tab parameters:

• Editing the Part tab parameters:

• Editing the Detail tab parameters:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [D]/[E] (TYPE

SELECT  (select a Vocal Harmony type)  [8 ] (EDIT)

 TAB [][] OVERVIEW

 TAB [][] PART

 TAB [][] DETAIL

Microphone (Vocal/Talk) settings:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [A]/[B] (MIC SET-

TING)  TAB[][] VOCAL/TALK

Saving the Microphone settings:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [A]/[B] (MIC SET-

TING)  [H] (USER MEMORY)  [6 ] (SAVE)

86 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Mixing Console

– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over various

sonic aspects of the keyboard parts and Song/Style channels,

including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds.

1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING

CONSOLE display.

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the

MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts.

The part name is indicated at the top of the display.

Basic Procedure

NOTE

You can switch between the Pages and

Parts of STYLE and SONG by pressing

the [A] (PART) button.

Song, Style, Multi Pad, MIC (only PSR-S950), Key-

board parts (Left, Right 1, 2)

Page 1: Rhythm 1, 2, Bass, Chord 1, 2, Pad, Phrase 1, 2

Page 2 (only PSR-S950): Rhythm 1, 2, Audio

Part: Song channels 1 – 8

Part: Song channels 9 – 16

PANEL

STYLE

(1/2 or 2/2)

SONG (CH 1-8

or CH 9-16)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 87

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired page.

For details about each display Page, refer to the Reference Manual on the

website.

• VOL/VOICE: Changes the Voice for each part and adjusts panning and vol-

ume for each part.

• FILTER: Adjusts the Harmonic Content (resonance) and sound bright-

ness.

• TUNE: Pitch-related settings (tuning, transpose, etc.).

• EFFECT: Selects the effect type and adjusts the effect depth for each

part.

• EQ: Adjusts equalization parameters to correct the tone or timbre

of the sound.

4 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select a parameter, then use the

[1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the value for each part.

5 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings.

NOTE

If you simultaneously hold down one

of the [A] – [J] buttons and use the

[1 ] – [8 ] buttons (or the

DATA ENTRY dial), you can instantly

set the same parameter value to all

other parts.

• To save the PANEL display settings:

• To save the STYLE display settings:

Save them as Style data.

1. Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [B] STYLE CREATOR

2. Press the [EXIT] button to close the REC CHANNEL display.

3. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for sav-

ing your data, then save it (page 26).

• To save the SONG display settings:

First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SETUP), then save the

Song.

1. Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [A] SONG CREATOR

2. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the CHANNEL Page.

3. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “SETUP.”

4. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button.

5. Press the [I] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your

data, then save it (page 26).

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 9.

Editing VOL/VOICE parameters:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] VOL/VOICE

Editing FILTER parameters:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] FILTER

Editing TUNE parameters:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] TUNE

Changing an Effect type:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] EFFECT  [F] TYPE

Editing EQ parameters:

[MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] EQ

88 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Connections

– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

This chapter covers the terminals and jacks of this instrument. For details on the locations of these connectors, refer

to “Panel Controls and Terminals” on pages 12 – 13.

To the [MIC/LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4” phone jack), you can connect a microphone, guitar, or other various equip-

ment. For instructions on connecting a microphone, refer to page 82.

Note that you need to select “MIC” or “LINE IN” depending on the connected equipment. When the output level of

the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set the [MIC LINE] switch to “MIC.” When the

output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer, keyboard, CD player) is high, set the [MIC LINE]

switch to “LINE.”

CAUTION

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on

or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss

may occur.

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/LINE IN] jack)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 89

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the

OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks. When using the PSR-S950, the microphone or guitar

sound connected to the instrument’s [MIC/LINE IN] jack is output at the same time.

When these are connected, you can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial

to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device.

You can connect the headphone jack of a portable audio player to the instrument’s

[AUX IN] jack, letting you hear the sound of that portable audio player through the

built-in speakers of the instrument.

Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack)

NOTE

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs

having no (zero) resistance.

NOTE

Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connec-

tion with a monaural device.

NOTICE

When the instrument’s sound is

output to an external device, first

turn on the power to the instru-

ment, then to the external

device. Reverse this order when

you turn the power off. Other-

wise, damage to the instrument

and external device may occur.

Because this instrument’s power

may automatically be turned off

due to the Auto Power Off func-

tion (page 15), turn off the power

to the external device, or disable

the Auto Power Off when you do

not intend to operate the instru-

ment for a while.

NOTICE

Do not route the output from the

[OUTPUT] jacks to the [AUX IN]

jack. If you make this connec-

tion, the signal input at the [AUX

IN] jack is output from the [OUT-

PUT] jacks. These connections

could result in a feedback loop

that will make normal perfor-

mance impossible, and may

even damage the equipment.

Using an External Stereo System for Playback

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Phone plug

(standard)

Input jack

Powered speaker

Playing a Portable Audio Player with the Built-in Speakers

NOTICE

When the sound of an external

device is output to the instru-

ment, first turn on the power to

the external device, then to the

instrument. Reverse this order

when you turn the power off.

Otherwise, damage to the instru-

ment and external device may

occur.

NOTE

The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME]

setting affects the input signal from the

[AUX IN] jack.

Stereo mini plug

Audio cable

Stereo mini plug

Headphone jack

Portable audio

player

90 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

You can connect the instrument directly to an external TV monitor for displaying the

lyrics and chords of your song data on a large screen.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SCREEN OUT

2 Set the monitor type and screen contents.

Connecting a Separate TV Monitor ([VIDEO OUT] jack)

CAUTION

Avoid looking at the television or

video monitor for prolonged peri-

ods of time since doing so could

damage your eyesight. Take fre-

quent breaks and focus your eyes

on distant objects to avoid eye-

strain.

RCA pin plug

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

Video cable

Screen Out Settings

[1 ]/

[2 ]

MONITOR

TYPE

Selects the desired output monitor type (NTSC or PAL) to correspond to the standard used

by your video equipment.

NOTE

The instrument’s default setting for the external TV monitor signal is “PAL.” Depending on your particular locale,

the standard may be different and the setting should be changed accordingly. (For example, NTSC is generally

used in North America.) Check the standard used by your TV monitor, and if it is not PAL, change the setting to

“NTSC.”

[3 ]/

[4 ]

SCREEN CON-

TENT

Determines the contents of the Video Out signal.

LYRICS/TEXT: Only the lyrics of the Song or text files are output, regardless of the display

that is called up on the instrument.

LCD: The currently selected display is output.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 91

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Optional footswitches (Yamaha FC4 or FC5) and an optional Foot controller (Yamaha FC7) can be connected to

one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks. A footswitch can be used for switching functions on and off, while a foot controller

controls continuous parameter such as volume.

Default functions

By assigning the function for each foot switch/controller, you can conveniently

control sustain and volume with either pedal jack or control many other functions by

pedal.

• Example: Controlling Song Start/Stop by footswitch

Connect a footswitch (FC4 or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks.

To assign the function to the connected pedal, select “SONG PLAY/PAUSE” in the

operation display: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] FOOT

PEDAL.

Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller ([FOOT PEDAL] jacks)

FOOT PEDAL 1 Switches sustain on or off. Use an FC4 or FC5 footswitch.

FOOT PEDAL 2 Controls the Super Articulation Voices (page 35). Use an FC4 or FC5 footswitch.

NOTE

Do not connect or disconnect the

pedal when the power is on.

FC4 FC7FC5

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10.

Assigning specific functions to each foot

pedal:

[FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [ E][F] FOOT

PEDAL

92 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

By connecting a USB flash memory to the instrument’s [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can save data you’ve

created to the device.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal)

Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions

below.

NOTE

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Compatible USB devices

• USB flash memory

• USB hub

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTE

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on

the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the

proper direction.

NOTICE

• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB storage device during

playback/recording, file management (such as Save, Copy, Delete

and Format operations) or accessing the USB storage device. Fail-

ure to do so may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instru-

ment or corruption of the USB storage device and the data.

• When connecting then disconnecting the USB storage device (and

vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two

operations.

NOTE

• If you intend to connect two USB flash memories at the same time to a termi-

nal, you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered

(with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can

be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the

hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-con-

nect the USB hub.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters.

• (PSR-S950) The instrument supports USB 1.1 and 2.0.

• (PSR-S750) Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can

connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument.

Using USB Flash Memories

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash memory,

you can save data you’ve created to the connected USB

flash memory, as well as read data from the connected

USB flash memory.

Maximum number of USB flash memories

allowed

Up to two USB flash memories can be simultaneously

connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If

necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB flash

memories that can be used simultaneously with the

instrument even when a USB hub is used is a maximum

of two.)

Formatting USB flash memory

When a USB flash memory is connected, a message may

appear prompting you to format the USB flash memory.

If so, execute the Format operation (page 93).

NOTICE

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make

sure that the USB flash memory you are formatting does not contain

important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting

multiple USB flash memories.

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB

flash memory. If you are saving data to the USB flash

memory, make sure to disable write-protect.

Turning off the instrument

When turning off the instrument, make sure that the

instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash memory by

playback/recording or file management (such as during

Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do

so may corrupt the USB flash memory and the data.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 93

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

When a USB flash memory is connected, a message may appear prompting you to

format the USB flash memory. If so, execute the format operation.

1 Connect a USB flash memory for formatting into the [USB TO

DEVICE].

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] MEDIA

3 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the USB flash memory to be

formatted from the device list.

The indications USB 1 and USB 2 will be displayed depending on the number

of the connected devices.

4 Press the [H] (FORMAT) button to format the USB flash memory.

By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data

between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a computer

with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-related Operations” on the Yamaha

website (page 7).

Formatting a USB Flash Memory

NOTICE

The format operation deletes any

previously existing data. Make

sure that the USB flash memory

you are formatting does not con-

tain important data. Proceed

with caution, especially when

connecting multiple USB flash

memories.

NOTE

Playback of Style, Song and Multi

Pads is stopped to enable execution of

the format operation.

Confirming the remaining memory

You can check the remaining memory of the connected USB flash memory by pressing the [F] (PROP-

ERTY) button.

Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal)

NOTE

• The instrument will begin trans-

mission a short time after the USB

connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to con-

nect the instrument to your com-

puter, make the connection directly

without passing through a USB

hub.

• For information on setting up your

sequence software, refer to the

owner’s manual of the relevant soft-

ware.

NOTICE

Use an AB type USB cable of less

than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables

cannot be used.

USB cable

94 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Use the MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices (keyboard,

sequencer, etc.).

• MIDI IN

Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device.

• MIDI OUT

Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument to another MIDI device.

For detailed information about the instrument’s MIDI settings, refer to the Reference

Manual.

Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive

(playback)

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI device

NOTE

For a general overview of MIDI and

how you can effectively use it, refer to

“MIDI Basics” which is downloadable

from Yamaha website (page 7).

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10.

MIDI settings:

[FUNCTION]  [I] MIDI  [8 ] (EDIT)

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 95

Utility – Making Global Settings –

Utility

– Making Global Settings –

The Utility section in the Function menu provides a variety of

convenient tools and settings for the instrument. These include

general settings that affect the entire instrument, as well as

detailed settings for specific functions. Also included are data

reset functions and storage media control, such as media

formatting.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY

2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up desired page.

• CONFIG 1

General settings such as Fade in/out time, Metronome sound, Parameter lock,

Tap Tempo sound, Auto Power Off.

• CONFIG 2

General settings such as displayed items for Voice/Style selection display, pop-

up display time, etc.

• SCREEN OUT (PSR-S950)

Monitor type and display content settings which are necessary when connecting

a TV monitor (page 90).

•MEDIA

Settings related to a connected USB flash memory, such as formatting (page 93)

and confirmation of memory size.

•OWNER

Settings of Owner name, Message language (page 16) and background of the

Main display. Parameter setting backup/restore operations (page 31) can also be

done in this page.

• SYSTEM RESET

Resets the settings of the instrument.

3 If necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired

parameter.

4 Change the settings by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons or

execute the operation by using the [D] – [J] buttons.

For details of the Utility settings, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Basic Procedure

96 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Overall

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument

or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further

away from the instrument.

There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes

played on the keyboard.

This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system.

Some Voices have a looping sound.

Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending

upon the Voice.

The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard. The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate

level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/

[RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on.

The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the

volume in the BALANCE display (page 53).

Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (pages 52, 57).

Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug

the headphones.

The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, muting the sound. Press the

[FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off.

The sound is distorted or noisy. The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant vol-

ume settings are appropriate.

This may be caused by certain effects or filter settings. Check the

effect or filter settings and change them accordingly, referring to

the Reference Manual.

Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 99) of

the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the

earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played

notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback vol-

ume.

The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the

volume in the BALANCE display (page 53).

The Main display does not appear even when turning the power

on.

This may occur if a USB flash memory has been installed to the

instrument. Installation of some USB flash memories may result a

long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the

Main display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting

the device.

Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate

language for the file/folder name (page 16).

An existing file is not shown. The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted.

Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a

computer.

Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be han-

dled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of

characters to 50 or less.

When the power is turned on, the message “The USB storage

devices cannot be authenticated” appears.

If a protected Expansion Pack is installed to the instrument, in

order to use the Voices or Styles contained in the Expansion Pack

you need to connect the USB flash memory which was used for

installing. Connect the proper USB flash memory to the instrument

and turn the power to the instrument on again.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 97

Troubleshooting

Voice

The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not

sound.

Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 35). If

necessary, press the appropriate PART ON/OFF button to turn the

part on.

A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The sound is

slightly different each time the keys are played.

The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and both parts

are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change

the Voice of one of the parts.

Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the

upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some Voices have a pitch limit which, when

reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

Style

The Style does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is

pressed.

The Rhythm channel of the selected Style may not contain any

data. Turn the [ACMP] button on and play left-hand section on the

keyboard to sound the accompaniment part of the Style.

Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press

the [ACMP] button.

You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard.

Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard.

Styles in a USB flash memory cannot be selected. If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the

Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be han-

dled by the instrument.

Song

Songs cannot be selected. This may be because the language settings have been changed.

Set the appropriate language for the Song file name.

If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the

Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be han-

dled by the instrument.

Song playback does not start. The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to

the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) but-

ton.

Song playback stops before the Song is finished. The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting”

for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn

off the guide function.

The measure number is different from that of the score in the

Song Position display, shown by pressing the [G](REW)/

[H](FF) buttons.

This happens when playing back music data for which a specific,

fixed tempo is set.

When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on

for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 57).

The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed

correctly.

Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special

“free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, mea-

sure and music notation will not be displayed correctly.

98 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

USB Audio function

The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and then the

recording was aborted.

Make sure to use a compatible USB flash memory (page 92).

Make sure that the USB flash memory has enough memory

(page 68).

If you are using a USB flash memory to which data has already

been recorded, check first that no important data remains on the

device, then format it (page 93) and try recording again.

Audio files cannot be selected. The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The

compatible formats are: MP3 and WAVE (PSR-S950), WAVE (PSR-

S750). The DRM protected files cannot be played back.

Recorded file is played back at a different volume compared to

when it was recorded.

The audio playback volume has been changed. Setting the volume

value to 100 plays back the file at the same volume as when it was

recorded (page 67).

Mixing Console

The sound seems strange or different than expected when

changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from

the Mixer.

When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum kits, etc.) of

the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings

related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be

unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback,

you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of

the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style

play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style

again.

Microphone/Vocal Harmony (PSR-S950)

The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song record-

ing. Use the USB Audio function (page 67).

Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound. Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 83).

The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of-tune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds,

such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass

sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy

this:

• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.

• Use a unidirectional microphone.

• Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume

control (page 14, 53).

Foot Pedal

The on/off setting of the footswitch connected to the FOOT

PEDAL jack is reversed.

Turn the instrument’s power off, then turn it on again without press-

ing the footswitch.

[AUX IN] jack

Sound input to the [AUX IN] jack is interrupted. The output volume of the external device connected to this instru-

ment is too low. Increase the output volume of the external device.

The volume level reproduced via this instrument can be adjusted

by using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 99

Specifications

PSR-S950 PSR-S750

Size and Weight

Width x Height x Depth (without Music Rest) 1,002 x 148 x 437 mm (39 7/16” x 5 13/16” x 17 3/16”)

Weight (without Music Rest) 11.5 kg (25 lbs., 6 oz.) 11 kg (24 lbs., 4 oz.)

Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61

Type Organ

Touch Response Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2

Controllers

Pitch Bend Wheel Yes

Modulation Wheel Yes

Display

Type

5.7 inch color LCD

(320 x 240 dots TFT QVGA)

5.7 inch B/W LCD

(320 x 240 dots STN QVGA)

Contrast — Yes

Language English, German, French, Spanish, Italian

Panel Language English

Voices

Tone Generation

Technology

AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony

Number of Polyphony

(Max.)

128

Preset

Number of Voices

786 + 33 Drum/SFX Kits + 480 XG +

GM2 + GS (for GS Song Playback)

678 + 28 Drum/SFX Kits + 480 XG +

GM2 + GS (for GS Song Playback)

Featured Voices

62 Super Articulation, 23 Mega

Voices, 27 Sweet!, 64 Cool!, 39 Live!,

20 Organ Flutes!

38 Super Articulation, 18 Mega

Voices, 24 Sweet!, 46 Cool!, 29 Live!,

10 Organ Flutes!

Expandability

Expansion Voice Yes (approx. 64 MB max.)

Editing Voice Set

Compatibility XG, XF, GS, GM, GM2

Part Right 1, Right 2, Left

Styles

Preset

Number of Styles 408 325

Featured Styles

25 +Audio, 1 FreePlay, 350 Pro,

32 Session

295 Pro, 30 Session

Fingering

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Control INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4, BREAK, ENDING x 3

Compatibility Style File Format, Style File Format GE

Expandability

Expansion Style Yes

Expansion Audio Style Yes (approx. 64 MB max.) —

Other Features

Music Finder (Max.) 2,500 Records 1,200 Records

One Touch Setting (OTS) 4 for each Style

Songs

Preset Number of Songs 5

Recording

Number of Songs Unlimited (depending on USB flash memory capacity)

Number of Tracks 16

Data Capacity approx. 300 KB/Song

Recording Function Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording

Data Format

Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF

Recording SMF (Format 0)

Multi Pads

Preset

Number of Multi Pad

Banks

126 banks x 4 Pads 123 banks x 4 Pads

Audio Audio Link Yes

Functions

Voices

Voice Creator Yes

Harmony/Echo Yes

Panel Sustain Yes

Mono/Poly Yes

Voice Information Yes

Styles

Style Creator Yes

Style Recommender Yes

OTS Information Yes

Songs

Song Creator Yes

Score Display Function Yes

Lyrics Display Function Yes

Lesson/Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo

Performance Assistant

Technology (P.A.T.)

Yes

Multi Pads Multi Pad Creator Yes

100 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or

specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha

dealer.

Functions

Registration Memory

Number of Buttons

8 presets/bank

(unlimited number of banks, depending on USB flash memory capacity)

Control Registration Sequence, Freeze

USB Audio

Recording .wav

Playback .wav,.mp3 .wav

Time Stretch Yes —

Pitch Shift Yes —

Vocal Cancel Yes —

Demo/Help Demonstration Yes

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tem p o 5 – 5 0 0 , Ta p Tem p o

Transpose -12 – 0 – +12

Tuning 414.8 – 440 – 466.8 Hz

Octave Button Yes

Scale Type 9 Presets

Miscellaneous

Text Display Function Yes

Wallpaper Customization Main, Lyrics —

Direct Access Yes

Effects

Reverb 44 Presets + 3 User

Chorus 106 Presets + 3 User 71 Presets + 3 User

DSP

DSP 1: 295 Presets + 3 User,

DSP 2-4: 295 Presets + 10 User

DSP 1: 295 Presets + 3 User,

DSP 2-4: 128 Presets + 10 User

Master EQ 5 Presets + 2 User

Part EQ 28 Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left, Multi Pad, Style x 8, Song x 16)

Mic Effects

Noise Gate x 1, Compressor x 1,

3Band EQ x 1

—

Vocal Harmony

Number of Presets 44 —

Number of User Settings 60 —

Vocal Effect 23 —

Storage

Internal Memory approx. 6.7 MB approx. 1.9 MB

Internal Memory (for

Expansion Pack)

approx. 64 MB

External Drives USB Flash Memory, etc. (via USB TO DEVICE)

Connections

DC IN 16 V

Microphone Yes —

AUX IN Yes

Headphones Yes

OUTPUT R, L/L+R

VIDEO OUT Yes —

FOOT PEDAL (optional) Switch or Volume x 2

USB TO DEVICE Yes

USB TO HOST Yes

MIDI In/Out

Amplifiers and

Speakers

Amplifiers 15 W x 2

Speakers 13 cm + 2.5 cm dome tweeter (x 2) 13 cm + 5 cm (x 2)

Pedals Assignable Functions

Volume, Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, Glide, S. Articulation, Song Play/Pause,

Style Start/Stop, etc.

Power Supply

AC Power Adaptor PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Power Consumption 16 W 13 W

Auto Power Off Function Yes

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• Online Member Product Registration

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet in order to fill out the User

Registration form.

• Music Rest

• AC Power Adaptor (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

This may not be included depending on your particular area. Please check

with your Yamaha dealer.

Optional

Accessories

AC Power Adaptor PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Headphones HPE-160

USB-MIDI Interface UX-16

Footswitches FC4/FC5

Foot controller FC7

Keyboard Stand

L-6/L-7

(The exterior size of the PSR-S950/S750 is beyond the limits as described in

the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests

that the stand can be safely used for the instrument.)

PSR-S950 PSR-S750

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 101

Index

Symbols

+Audio.............................................44

Numerics

1-16 (Song Creator) ........................63

A-B Repeat................................59, 66

AC Power Adaptor ..................14

, 100

Accompaniment ..............................43

Adaptor ...........................................14

ADD TO FAVORITE .........................78

ADD TO MF .....................................77

AI Full Keyboard..............................45

Air Vents ..........................................12

ASSEMBLY (Style Creator)..............53

Audio ...............................................64

Audio Link .......................................71

Audio Style ......................................44

Audio Volume ..................................66

Auto Accompaniment......................43

Auto Fill............................................47

Auto Power Off ................................15

Backup ............................................31

Balance .....................................53

, 67

Bar.............................................22

, 56

BASIC (Style Creator)......................53

BASS (Style Channel)......................52

Beat .................................................22

Break (Style).................................... 47

CENTER (Volume Balance).............67

CHANNEL .......................... 53

, 57, 63

Character entry ...............................30

CHD1/2 (Style Channel) ..................52

CHORD .....................................45

, 63

CHORD FINGERING .................45

, 53

Chord Match ................................... 70

Chordal ........................................... 84

Computer ........................................ 93

Computer-related Operations ........... 7

CONFIG 1/2 .................................... 95

Contrast .......................................... 16

COPY (File) ..................................... 28

CUT (File)........................................ 28

Data List............................................ 7

DELETE (Delete) ............................. 29

Demo ........................................ 17

, 33

Direct Access ................................. 21

Drum Voice ..................................... 32

DSP ................................................. 40

EDIT (Vocal Harmony) .................... 85

EFFECT ..................................... 39

, 87

EFFECT/EQ ..................................... 42

Ending section ................................ 46

EQ ................................................... 87

Expansion Pack .............................. 36

Factory-programmed Settings ........ 31

Fading In/Out .................................. 47

Fast Forward ................................... 55

File ............................................ 25

, 26

File Selection Display...................... 24

Fill-in section ................................... 47

FILTER ............................................ 87

FOLDER (File) ................................. 27

Foot Controller ................................ 91

Footage........................................... 41

Footswitch....................................... 91

Force-quit........................................ 15

Format....................................... 64

, 93

FREEZE........................................... 81

GM .............................................. 6, 42

GROOVE (Style Creator) ................ 53

GS..................................................... 6

Guide .............................................. 58

GUIDE MODE ................................. 58

Guitar .............................................. 88

Harmonic Content........................... 87

Harmony/Echo ................................ 39

Headphones ................................... 13

Icon................................................. 30

INFO. ............................33

, 36, 71, 81

Input Level ................................ 23

, 83

Input Volume............................. 23

, 82

Intro section .................................... 46

Keyboard Part................................. 35

KEYBOARD/PANEL .................. 39

, 42

Lamp Status.............................. 46, 80

Language ....................................... 16

Left Hold ......................................... 35

Left part .................................... 34

, 35

Lyrics ........................................ 57

, 90

Main Display ................................... 22

Main section ................................... 47

MASTER TUNE ......................... 38

, 42

MEDIA............................................. 93

MegaVoice...................................... 35

Message ......................................... 21

Metronome...................................... 61

Index

102 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual

Microphone .....................................82

MIDI Basics .......................................7

Mixing Console................................86

MONITOR TYPE ..............................90

MONO .............................................40

MP3 .................................................64

Multi Pad .........................................69

Multi Pad Creator ............................72

Multi Track Recording .....................62

Music Finder....................................73

Music Notation ................................56

Music Rest....................................... 12

NAME (File) .....................................28

NEXT (Song Playback)....................55

NEXT CANCEL ................................55

One Touch Setting (OTS) ................49

Organ Flutes Voice..........................41

ORGAN TYPE.................................. 41

OTS INFO. .......................................50

OTS Link.......................................... 49

OTS Link Timing ..............................49

OWNER .....................................16

, 31

P.A.T (Performance Assistant

Technology) ....................................63

PAD (Style Channel)........................52

Panel Setting ...................................73

PARAMETER (Style Creator) ...........53

PASTE (File) ....................................29

Pause .............................................. 55

Percussion Voice.............................32

Performance Assistant

Technology (P.A.T)..........................63

PHR1/2 (Style Channel)...................52

Phrase Mark ....................................56

Pitch ..........................................38

, 87

PITCH BEND RANGE...................... 39

Pitch Shift ........................................67

Portable Audio Player......................89

Power Adaptor ................................14

PRESET (File Selection Display) .....24

Protected Song ...............................67

Quick Recording............................. 60

REC................................................. 23

REC MODE (Song Creator) ............ 63

REC WAIT ....................................... 23

RECOMMEND................................. 50

Record (Music Finder) ..............73

, 75

RECORD EDIT ................................ 78

Recording (Audio) .......................... 67

Recording (Song) ........................... 60

Reference Manual............................. 7

REGIST BANK................................. 80

Registration Memory....................... 80

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE .......... 81

Repeat ......................................59

, 66

REPERTOIRE .................................. 48

RESTORE........................................ 31

Rewind ............................................ 55

RHY1/2 (Style Channel) .................. 52

Right 1-2 parts ....................32

, 33, 35

ROTARY SP SPEED ........................ 41

S.Art! (Super Articulation Voice) ..... 35

SAVE (File) ...................................... 26

SCALE TUNE ............................38

, 42

Score............................................... 56

SCREEN CONTENT ........................ 90

SCREEN OUT ................................. 90

SEARCH (Music Finder) ................. 76

SETUP (Vocal Harmony) ................. 84

SFF/SFF GE....................................... 6

Single Finger................................... 45

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ............... 54

SOLO .............................................. 52

Song................................................ 54

Song Creator................................... 63

SONG SETTING.............................. 63

Speaker..................................... 13

, 89

Split Point .................................. 35

, 53

Standard MIDI File (SMF) ............... 54

STEP REC ....................................... 53

Style ................................................ 43

Style Creator ................................... 53

Style File Format (SFF) ...................... 6

Style Recommender ....................... 50

STYLE SETTING ............................. 53

SUSTAIN......................................... 40

Synchro Start ................44

, 46, 55, 70

Synchro Stop .................................. 46

SYS/EX. (Song Creator) .................. 63

SYSTEM RESET ........................ 31

, 95

Talk ................................................. 85

Tempo............................................. 47

Text ........................................... 57

, 90

Time Stretch.............................. 44

, 67

Touch Response............................. 40

Transpose....................................... 38

TUNE .............................................. 87

TV Monitor....................................... 90

TYPE SELECT ................................. 83

UP (File) .......................................... 25

USB (File Selection Display)........... 24

USB Audio ...................................... 64

USB Flash Memory ......................... 92

USER (File Selection Display)......... 24

UTILITY ........................................... 95

Version Number.............................. 17

Vibrato ...................................... 39

, 41

Vocal Cancel .................................. 67

Vocal Harmony (VH) ....................... 82

Vocoder .......................................... 84

Vocoder Mono ................................ 84

Voice............................................... 32

VOICE SET...................................... 42

VOL/VOICE ..................................... 87

Volume..........................14

, 53, 66, 67

VOLUME/ATTACK .......................... 42

WAVE.................................. 64, 67, 71

XF...................................................... 6

XG............................................... 6

, 42

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 103

Index

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge

som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten

har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE

afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er

tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita

koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc.,

may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bot-

tom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space

provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record

of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques.

Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électron-

iques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels.

Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électron-

iques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et

aux Directives 2002/96/EC.

En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la

sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pour-

raient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprié des déchets.

Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électron-

iques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez

acheté les produits.

[Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne]

Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre

vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d'informations.

[Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne]

Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets

d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander

la méthode de traitement appropriée.

(weee_eu)

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic

products should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in

accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative

effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste

disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further informa-

tion.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authori-

ties or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

(weee_eu)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in

your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

(2 wires)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digita Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-S950/S750

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

1-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

ON ARRANGER WORKSTATION KEYBOARDS

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and

every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer

you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from

Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in

the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized

Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor

or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will

pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not

cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation

or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be

presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any

unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic

maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature

or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f)

RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if

applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This

warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful,

contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product

to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to

whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or

check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied

by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or

other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted

for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only

if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO

THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha

Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más

cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Poland Office

ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: 02-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED

Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI4

PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 109

ZA70190

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

205POZC*.*-01A0

Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

English Français English Digital Workstation Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Français Owner’s Manual Mode d'emploi Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Workstation! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4 – 5. Merci d'avoir choisi ce Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Yamaha ! Nous vous conseillons de lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi afin de tirer pleinement profit des fonctions avancées et très utiles de votre instrument. Nous vous recommandons également de garder ce manuel à portée de main pour toute référence ultérieure. Avant d'utiliser l'instrument, lisez attentivement la section « PRÉCAUTIONS D'USAGE » aux pages 4 et 5. EN FR Table of Contents Included Accessories ......................................................6 Formats ............................................................................6 About the Manuals ...........................................................7 Welcome to Digital Workstation 10 Starting Up 14 Turning the Power On and Playing the Keyboard..........14 Adjusting the Contrast of the Display (PSR-S750 only) .............................................................16 Changing the Display Language ...................................16 Displaying the Version Number .....................................17 Playing the Demos .........................................................17 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment...............43 Chords ...........................................................................45 Operating Style Playback...............................................46 Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (Repertoire) ..............................................48 Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting) .................................49 Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender) ....................................................50 Turning Style Parts On/Off and Changing Voices..........52 Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Style and Keyboard ................................................................53 3 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 54 Playback of Songs .........................................................54 Displaying Music Notation (Score).................................56 Displaying Lyrics (Text)..................................................57 Turning Song Channels On/Off ......................................57 Practicing the Right-hand Part with Guide Functions ....58 Repeat Playback ............................................................59 Recording Your Performance.........................................60 2 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 6 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 69 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 73 Selecting a Record (Your Desired Music Genre) ..........75 Finding Your Desired Record (Panel Settings) via Search............................................................................76 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File .........................77 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 79 Registering Your Panel Setups ......................................79 Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file .............80 Recalling a Registered Panel Setup ..............................81 32 43 64 Playing the Multi Pads....................................................69 Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function ..................70 Using Chord Match........................................................70 Using WAVE Files for the Multi Pads .............................71 8 Playing Preset Voices ....................................................32 Expanding Voices ..........................................................36 Transposing the Pitch of the Keyboard..........................38 Using the Wheels ...........................................................39 Applying Voice Effects ...................................................39 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ..................41 2 5 18 Display-based Controls..................................................18 Messages Shown in the Display ....................................21 Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access........21 Main Display Configuration ............................................22 File Selection Display Configuration ..............................24 File Management ...........................................................26 Entering Characters .......................................................30 Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings .............31 Data Backup ..................................................................31 USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files – Playing Back Audio Files ...............................................64 Recording Your Performance as Audio .........................67 8 Panel Controls and Terminals Basic Operations 4 Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing – 82 Connecting a Microphone .............................................82 Applying the Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Voice.......83 9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 86 Basic Procedure ............................................................86 10 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 88 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/LINE IN] jack).......................................................88 Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) ..................89 Connecting a Separate TV Monitor ([VIDEO OUT] jack)........................................................90 Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller ([FOOT PEDAL] jacks) ...................................................91 Connecting a USB Flash Memory ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal)..........................................92 Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal) .93 Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals)............................................94 11 Utility – Making Global Settings – 95 Basic Procedure ............................................................95 Troubleshooting 96 Specifications 99 Index 101 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Water warning Power supply/AC power adaptor • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 100) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Location Power supply/AC power adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. DMI-5 4 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Handling caution • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • The edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings are lost when you turn off the power of the instrument without saving. Save the edited data to the instrument (USER tab display) or a USB flash memory (USB tab display); see page 24. Moreover, it is safer to save the data to a USB flash memory, because the data in the USER tab display may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. To protect against data loss through USB flash memory damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB flash memories. • Data other than above (edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings) is automatically stored, when you change the settings in a display page and then exit from that page. However, the data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. Information  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • (PSR-S950) MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. DMI-5 2/2 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 5 Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual • Online Member Product Registration You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet in order to fill out the User Registration form. • Music Rest • AC Power Adaptor This may not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Formats The instrument is compatible with the following formats. “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. “SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conversion system to provide highquality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of SFF, which features improved note transposition for guitar tracks. The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for the songs pre-installed in this instrument: (PSR-S950, PSR-S750) Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken ©1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission (PSR-S950) Achy Breaky Heart (Don’t Tell My Heart) Words and Music by Don Von Tress Copyright ©1991 UNIVERSAL - MILLHOUSE MUSIC All Rights Reserved Used by Permission (PSR-S750) Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright ©1961; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP) Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved 6 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals This instrument has the following document and instructional materials.  Included Document Owner’s Manual (this book) Provides overall explanations of the PSR-S950/S750 basic functions. See “How to use this Owner’s Manual” below.  Online Materials (PDF) Reference Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish) About the Manuals Explains advanced features of the instrument, not explained in the Owner’s Manual. For example, you can learn how to create original Styles, Songs or Multi Pads, or find detailed explanations of specific parameters. Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDI-related information. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transferring song data. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Manual Library, enter “PSR-S950,” “PSR-S750” or “MIDI Basics” to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ How to use this Owner’s Manual Provides an overview of the chapter contents. Shows that this function is only available on one model. Shows the location of buttons which are explained in the chapter. Ex.: These icons indicate that this function is only on the PSR-S950 but not on the PSR-S750. The displays are taken from the PSR-S950, and in English. (These may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.) Chapter title for navigating through the manual. Boxed sections provide additional helpful information. Provides supplementary notes and detailed information. Introduces advanced features related to the chapter contents. Detailed explanations are provided in the Reference Manual (above). • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 7 Welcome to Digital Workstation Explore the Demos Starting Up The Demos showcase the variety of stunning Voices and Styles on the instrument, and give you hands-on experience using it. Play a Wide Variety of Instrument Voices Chapter 1 Voices The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices, but also features an exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments, both acoustic and electronic. Perform Along with a Backing Band Chapter 2 Styles Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing (Style function). Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, and various other music genres in the world — and let the instrument be your backing band! Play Along with Song Data Chapter 3 Songs Playing Back Songs ................page 54 Play along with a Song data, and fill out your solo performance with the sounds of an entire band or orchestra. Enjoy a wide variety of songs — commercially available music data and preset songs. Displaying Music Score ................page 56 While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation) automatically shown on the display — an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and practicing pieces. Recording Your Performance ................page 60 The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to internal memory or a USB flash memory. The instrument also lets you listen back to your performance, and further edit it or utilize it for your music production. 8 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Audio Playing and Recording from USB Flash Memory Chapter 4 USB Audio Welcome to Digital Workstation Audio files (WAVE or MP3*) saved to USB flash memory can be played back on the instrument. Moreover, you can record your performance as audio file (WAVE) to a USB flash memory device. On the PSR-S950, you can connect a microphone to the instrument and enjoy recording your singing along with the keyboard performance. * The MP3 format is supported only by the PSR-S950. On the PSR-S950 only, there are also a variety of advanced, convenient audio playback and processing functions. These include Repeat Mode, for specifying how audio files will be repeatedly played back, and an A-B Repeat function, for repeating a specific section in a audio song. Time Stretch lets you slow down or speed up an audio file without changing the pitch, while Pitch Shift lets you change the pitch of the audio without affecting the time. Moreover, a Vocal Cancel function effectively attenuates the vocals which may be positioned in the center of a file, allowing you to sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing. Add Phrases and Rhythms to Your Performance Chapter 5 Multi Pads You can add spice to your performance with special short phrases and rhythms, simply by tapping the Multi Pads. Multi Pads also have an Audio Link function that allows you to create your own audio data (sound effects, vocal phrases, and so on), and trigger them from the Pads as you perform. Call Up the Ideal Voice and Style for Each Song Chapter 6 Music Finder The convenient Music Finder function lets you call up the ideal panel settings including the most suitable Voice, Style, effects, etc. for each song, by selecting a “Record,” music genre or song title. Moreover, by registering Songs, audio and Style files saved in various places into Music Finder, the instrument can call up these Songs, audio and Style files easily from the song title. Add Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing (PSR-S950) Chapter 8 Microphone The instrument also lets you directly connect a microphone and use a variety of sophisticated processing tools specifically designed for vocals. These include an amazing Vocal Harmony function, which automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the gender of the harmony voices — for example, letting you add female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa) — or use the Vocal Doubler to make your single voice sound like many. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals  Top Panel % (PSR-S750) 1 5 ^ 2 6 3 4 7 8 ) @ & * ( 9 ! # $ 1 [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..............................Page 14 Turns on the instrument’s power or sets to standby. 9 [METRONOME] button Turns the metronome on or off. 2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................Page 14 Adjusts the overall volume. ) [FADE IN/OUT] button.................................... Page 47 Controls fade in/out of Style/Song playback. 3 [DEMO] button ................................................Page 17 Calls up the display for selecting a Demo. ! STYLE CONTROL buttons............................. Page 46 Controls Style playback. 4 [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button (PSR-S950) ......................................................Page 83 Calls up the display for adding various effects to the Microphone input. @ [PITCH BEND] wheel...................................... Page 39 Bends the pitch of the keyboard played sound up or down. 5 SONG buttons.................................................Page 54 Selects a Song and controls Song playback. $ [PHONES] jack ............................................... Page 13 For connecting a pair of headphones. 6 STYLE category selection buttons ...............Page 43 Selects a Style category. % [LCD CONTRAST] knob (PSR-S750) ............ Page 16 Adjusts the LCD contrast. 7 [TAP TEMPO]/TEMPO buttons ......................Page 47 Controls the tempo for Style, Song and Metronome playback. ^ LCD and related controls .............................. Page 18 8 TRANSPOSE buttons .....................................Page 38 Transposes the entire pitch of the instrument in semitone steps. 10 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual # [MODULATION] wheel ................................... Page 39 Applies a vibrato effect. & [BALANCE] button ......................................... Page 53 Calls up settings for the volume balance among the parts. C Panel Controls and Terminals B D E A F G H I J K * [MIXING CONSOLE] button ...........................Page 86 Calls up various settings for the keyboard, Style and Song parts. ( [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button...................Pages 52, 57 Calls up settings for turning Style/Song channels on or off. A [FUNCTION] button (See Reference Manual on website.) Lets you make advanced settings and create your original Styles, Songs and Multi Pads. B VOICE category selection buttons................Page 32 Selects a Voice. C [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button........................page 64 Calls up the display for playing back audio files and recording your performance in audio format. D [USB] button ...................................................page 24 Calls up the display for selecting a file in the USB flash memory. L E VOICE CONTROL buttons ............................. Page 39 Applies various effects to the keyboard performance. F [MUSIC FINDER] button................................. page 75 Calls up ideal panel setups for your performance. G PART SELECT buttons .................................. Page 35 Selects a keyboard part. H PART ON/OFF buttons ................................... Page 35 Turns the keyboard part on or off. I REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ............... Page 79 Registers and recalls panel setups. J MULTI PAD CONTROL buttons ..................... Page 69 Selects and plays a rhythmic or melodic Multi Pad phrase. K ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ..................... Page 49 Calls up the appropriate panel settings for the Style. L UPPER OCTAVE buttons ............................... Page 38 Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 11  Rear Panel 1 1 DC IN jack .......................................................Page 14 For connecting the power adaptor. 2 [FOOT PEDAL] jacks ......................................Page 91 For connecting Footswitches and/or Foot controllers. 3 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks .............................Page 89 For connecting external audio devices. Air Vents NOTICE This instrument has special air vents in the top panel and rear panel. Do not place objects where they might block the air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Attaching the Music Rest The instrument is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the top panel. 12 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 2 3 4 5 6 4 [AUX IN] jack................................................... Page 89 For connecting an external audio device, such as a portable audio player. 5 [MIC/LINE IN] jack (PSR-S950)...................... Page 88 For connecting a microphone or guitar. 6 [INPUT VOLUME] knob (PSR-S950).............. page 83 For adjusting the input level of the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Air Vents 7 9 ) ! 7 [MIC LINE] switch (PSR-S950).......................Page 88 For switching between “MIC” and “LINE” for proper use of the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. 8 MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals...............................Page 94 For connecting external MIDI devices. ) [USB TO DEVICE] terminal............................ Page 92 For connecting a USB flash memory. ! [VIDEO OUT] jack (PSR-S950) ...................... Page 90 For connecting to a television or video monitor. 9 [USB TO HOST] terminal................................Page 93 For connecting to a computer. Using the Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the [PHONES] jack. Standard phone plug CAUTION Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals 8 Starting Up Turning the Power On and Playing the Keyboard 1 Connect the power adaptor. First connect one end of the AC cable to the power adaptor, then connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the instrument’s DC IN jack on the rear panel. Finally, connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the electrical outlet. 1-2 1-1 1-3 AC cable Power adaptor DC plug The shape of the plug and outlet differs depending on locale. WARNING Use the specified adaptor (page 100) only. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-S950/S750, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC POWER ADAPTOR FROM THE AC OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-S950/S750 IS NOT IN USE. 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. The main display appears. 3 While playing the keyboard, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. NEXT PAGE 14 NOTE Before the main display appears, turning the power off, operating the buttons and playing the keyboard cannot be done. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 4 After you use the instrument, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power off. While recording or editing, or while messages are displayed: The power cannot be turned off even if you press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch. If you need to force-quit the instrument in such a situation, press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for longer than three seconds. CAUTION Even when the instrument is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the instrument for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Setting the Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off can be set as described below (default setting: 30 min.). The setting is retained even if the power is turned off. 1 Call up the operation display. NOTE [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 1 Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions. 2 NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • The data which is not saved to the USER or USB drive will be lost if the power automatically turns off. Make sure to save your data before the power turns off. 3 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “5. AUTO POWER OFF.” 3 Press the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the value. NOTE If you do not want to turn the power off automatically (disable the Auto Power Off), select OFF. The setting time is approximate. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 15 Starting Up NOTICE If you force-quit the instrument during recording or editing, the data might be lost, and the instrument and external devices might be damaged. Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method) Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key (C1) on the keyboard. An “Auto power off disabled” message appears briefly and Auto Power Off is disabled. C1 Adjusting the Contrast of the Display (PSR-S750 only) You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob located to the left of the display. Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER 2 2 16 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired language. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE Since the color display of the PSRS950 has a high level of visibility, no contrast adjustment function is necessary. Displaying the Version Number You can check the version number of this instrument. 1 Call up the operation display. 2 Use the [7 ]/[8 ] (VERSION) buttons to display the version number. 3 Press the [8 ] (EXIT) button (or the panel [EXIT] button) to return to the original display. Starting Up [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER Playing the Demos The Demos provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features and functions as well as sound demonstrations. 1 Press the [DEMO] button to call up the Demo display. 2 Press one of the [A] – [E] and [J] buttons to show a specific Demo. Pressing one of the [F] – [I] buttons plays back the overview Demo continuously, calling up the various displays in sequence. NOTE To return to the higher level menu, press the [EXIT] button. The sub menus are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the sub menu. 3 Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Demo display. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 17 Basic Operations Display-based Controls The LCD provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings. The displayed menu can be selected or changed by the controls around the LCD. TAB [E][F] buttons (page 19) [A] – [E] buttons (see below) [F] – [J] buttons (see below) [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 21) [1 ] – [8 ] buttons (page 19) [EXIT] button (page 21) [DATA ENTRY] dial and [ENTER] button (page 20) [A] – [J] buttons The [A] – [J] buttons are used to select the corresponding menu. • Example 1 In the File Selection display (page 24), the [A] – [J] buttons can be used to select the corresponding respective files (Voices). • Example 2 The [A] and [B] buttons are used to move the cursor up or down. 18 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual The [H] and [I] buttons are used to select the corresponding parameter. TAB [E][F] buttons Basic Operations These buttons are used mainly to change the pages of displays that have “tabs” at the top. [1 ] – [8 ] buttons The [1 ] – [8 ] buttons are used to make selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for functions shown directly above them. For menus that appear in this section of the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For menus that appear in this section of the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For list menus that appear, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to select the desired item. For parameters that appear in slider (or knob) form, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the value. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 19 [DATA ENTRY] dial and [ENTER] button Depending on the selected LCD, the [DATA ENTRY] dial can be used in the following two ways. • Selecting files (including Voices, Styles and Songs) When one of the File Selection displays (page 24) is shown, you can use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button to select a file (Voices, Styles, Songs, and others). Rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor. Press the [ENTER] button to actually select the highlighted file. • Adjusting the parameter values You can conveniently use the [DATA ENTRY] dial in tandem with the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust parameters indicated in the display. Rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the selected parameter. Select the desired parameter with the appropriate [1 ] – [8 ] button. This convenient technique also works well with pop-up parameters such as Tempo and Transpose. Simply press the appropriate button (ex., TEMPO [+]), then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial to set the value, then press [ENTER] to close the window. 20 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual [EXIT] button Messages Shown in the Display A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate button. Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. 1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. 2 Press the button (or move the wheel or connected pedal) corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. For example, pressing the [GUIDE] button calls up the display in which the Guide mode can be set. Refer to the Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 7.) PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 21 Basic Operations Pressing the [EXIT] button returns you to the previously indicated display. Pressing the [EXIT] button several times returns to the default Main display (page 22). Main Display Configuration The display that appears when the power is turned on is the Main display. The Main display shows the current basic settings such as the currently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard. NOTE ! @ 1 2 $ 3 4 5 6 # Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. 7y 8u 9u ) 1 Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 54). 2 Bar/Beat/Tempo Displays the current position (bar/beat/tempo) in Style playback or Song playback. 3 Current chord name When the [ACMP] button is set to on, the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed. When the Song containing the chord data is played, the current chord name will be displayed. 4 Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 38). 5 Upper Octave Displays the amount that the octave value is shifted (page 38). 6 Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [E] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 43). 7 Voice name Displays the Voice names currently selected for RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts (page 35). Pressing one of the [F] – [H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part. 8 Multi Pad Bank name Displays the names of the selected Multi Pad Bank. Pressing the [I] button calls up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 69). 22 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE When the Left Hold function (page 35) is on, an “H” indication appears next to the part name. 9 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name and Registration Memory number. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 80). ) Volume Balance NOTE Displays the volume balance among the parts in two pages. Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons (page 53). If the Volume Balance display is not shown, press the [BALANCE] button to show the Volume Balance display. ! USB Audio information Basic Operations Displays information for the selected audio file (elapsed playback time, file name and repeat mode). When the recording of USB Audio is in standby, a “REC WAIT” indication appears. While recording, “REC” appears. @ Registration Sequence Indicates the sequence order of the Registration Memory (page 79) numbers, which can be called up via the TAB [E][F] buttons or the pedal. For instructions on programming the sequence, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. # Split Point Displays the Split Point positions (page 35). $ MIC Input level indicator (PSR-S950) When a microphone is connected, this indicates the input level. Adjust the level with the [INPUT VOLUME] knob so that the indicator lights in green or yellow (but not in red). For details on the [INPUT VOLUME], refer to page 83. Pressing the [B]/[C]/[D] buttons calls up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 23 File Selection Display Configuration The File Selection display is for selecting Voice, Styles, and other data. The File Selection display appears when you press one of the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons, SONG [SELECT] button, etc. SONG [SELECT] button REGIST BANK [SELECT] buttons STYLE category selection buttons MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button VOICE category selection buttons 1 y 2 y 3 y 1 Location (drive) of data 24 PRESET Location where pre-programmed (preset) data is stored. USER Location where recorded or edited data is saved. Installed Expansion Voices or Styles are also saved here in the Expansion folder. USB Location where data on USB flash memory is saved. This appears only when USB flash memory is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal (page 92). PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE By pressing the [USB] button, you can also access the files of Voice, Styles, and other data which are saved in the USB flash memory. [USB]  [A] SONG/[B] AUDIO/[C] STYLE/[F] VOICE(RIGHT1)/[G] MULTI PAD/[H] REGIST. 2 Selectable data (files) NOTE The files that can be selected on this display are shown. If more than 10 files exist, the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) are shown below the files. Pressing the corresponding button changes the display page. When other pages follow, the “Next” button appears, and for the previous page, the “Prev.” button appears. The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “files.” NOTE The number of pages shown varies depending on the Selection display. 3 File/folder operation menu Basic Operations You can save and manage your data files (copy, move, delete, etc.) from this menu. For detailed instructions, refer to pages 26 – 29. Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder In the PRESET display, several data (files) are contained together in a folder. You can also organize your original data in the USER/USB display by creating several new folders (page 27). To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8 ] (UP) button. Example: PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. The next highest level — in this case, folder — is shown. Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately categorized Voices. This display shows the Voice files in a folder. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 25 File Management You can save your original data (such as Songs you’ve recorded and Voices you’ve edited) as a file to internal memory (User drive) or a USB flash memory. If you’ve saved a lot of files, it may be difficult to find the desired file quickly. To make it easier to find the files you want, you can organize your files in folders, rename the files, delete unnecessary files, etc. These operations are done in the File Selection display. IMPORTANT • Saving files or creating new folders cannot be done in the PRESET tab or the Expansion folder (installed Expansion Pack) in the USER tab. • Files in the PRESET tab and the Expansion folder in the USER tab cannot be renamed/moved/deleted. • Files in the Expansion folder in the USER tab cannot be copied. NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. Saving a File This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs you’ve recorded and Voices you’ve edited) as a file. 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 2 2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button. The naming display is called up. 3 Enter the file name (page 30). Even if you skip this step, you can rename the file at any time after saving it (page 28). 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file. The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. 26 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Creating a New Folder 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to create a new folder by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. If you want to create a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder here first. NOTE The maximum number of files/folders which can be saved in a folder is 500. NOTE In the USER tab display, folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files/folders which can be saved differs depending on the file size and the length of the file/folder names. 2 2 Press the [7 ] (FOLDER) button. The naming display for a new folder is called up. NOTE If you want to cancel to create a new folder, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. NOTICE 3 Input the name of the new folder (see page 30). Name the folder to something other than “Expansion.” Otherwise, all data contained in the “Expansion” folder will be lost when an Expansion Pack is installed. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 27 Basic Operations This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and organized as desired, making it easier to find and select your original data. Renaming a File/Folder This operation lets you rename files/folders. 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to rename by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 2 Press the [1 ] (NAME) button. The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display. 3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. 4 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. The naming display is called up. 5 Input the name (characters) of the selected file or folder (page 30). The renamed file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. NOTE To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. NOTICE Name the folder to something other than “Expansion.” Otherwise, all files contained in the “Expansion” folder will be lost when an Expansion Pack is installed. Copying or Moving Files This operation lets you copy or cut a file (or files) and paste it/them to another location (folder). You can also copy folders (but not move them) by using the same procedure. 1 2 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to copy by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. Press the [3 ] (COPY) button to copy or [2 ] (CUT) to move. The pop-up window for the Copy/Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display. NEXT PAGE 28 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Protected Songs which are saved to the User drive are marked by a “Prot. 1” indication at the upper left side of the file names and cannot be copied/moved to USB flash memories. • Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying. 3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again. Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. Select the destination tab (USER or USB) to paste the file/folder, by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. NOTE To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. 6 Basic Operations If necessary, select the destination folder by using the [A] – [J] buttons. Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder selected in step 3. The pasted file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Deleting Files/Folders This operation lets you delete individual or multiple files/folders. 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to delete by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 2 Press the [5 ] (DELETE) button. The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display. 3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again. Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL OFF) button again. NOTE 4 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. 5 Follow the on-display instructions. • YES • YES ALL • NO • CANCEL To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Delete the file/folder Delete all selected files/folders Leave the file/folder as is without deleting Cancel the Delete operation PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 29 Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters for naming your files/folders, inputting keywords to search for the appropriate panel settings (Music Finder), etc. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below. 2 1 1 4 3 Change the type of character by pressing the [1 ] button. • CASE • case 2 3 Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. Capital letters, numbers, marks Lowercase letters, numbers, marks Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position. Press the [2 ] – [6 ] and [7 ] buttons, corresponding to the character you wish to enter. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letterinput button. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the character will be entered automatically. For details on entering characters, refer to “Other character-entry operations” below. 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display. NOTE When inputting lyrics in the Song Creator function, you may also enter Japanese characters (kana and kanji). NOTE The following marks cannot be entered for a file/folder name. \/:*?"<>| NOTE The file name can contain up to 41 characters and the folder name can contain up to 50 characters. NOTE To cancel the character-entering operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Other character-entry operations • Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and press the [7 ] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at once, press and hold the [7 ] (DELETE) button. • Entering marks or space 1. Press the [6 ] (SYMBOL) button to call up the mark list. 2. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark or space, then press the [8 ] (OK) button. • Selecting custom icons for files (shown at left of file name) 1. Press the [1 ] (ICON) button to call up the ICON SELECT display. 2. Select the icon by using the [A] – [J] buttons, [3 ] – [5 ] buttons or [DATA ENTRY] dial. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select different pages. 3. Press the [8 ] (OK) button to apply the selected icon. 30 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE To cancel the operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings While holding the C6 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the power switch on. This resets all settings to the factory default. Basic Operations C6 You can also reset a specified setting to the factory default value. Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM RESET. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11. Data Backup This procedure backs up all data saved in USER drive (except Protected Songs and Expansion Voices/Styles) and all settings of the instrument to a USB flash memory. Yamaha recommends that you back up important data to a USB flash memory since the data in the instrument may be lost on occasion through malfunction or incorrect operation. 1 2 Connect the backup USB flash memory (destination). NOTICE Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER display before restoring. If the Songs are not moved, the operation deletes the data. NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] OWNER NOTE Completing the backup/restore operation may take a few minutes. NOTE 3 3 To save the Song, Style, Multi Pad, Registration Memory Bank and Voice independently, execute the Copy operation (page 28) from the File Selection display. Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the data to the USB flash memory. You can also back up a specified setting. Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM RESET. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11. Restoring the Data: You can restore the data by pressing the [E] (RESTORE) button in the Owner page of the UTILITY display. When the operation is complete, the instrument will be restarted automatically. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 31 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic instrumental Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, brass, wind instruments and more. Playing Preset Voices Selecting a Voice (RIGHT 1) and playing the keyboard 1 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button. IMPORTANT For information on the keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2 and Left), see page 35. 2 2 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button to turn on the Right 1 part. 3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice Selection display. Percussion/Drum Voices When one of the Voices is selected from this button, you can play various drums and percussion instruments or SFX (sound effects) sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum List provided in the Data List on the website. Organ Flutes Voices (page 41) Preset Voices The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice category selection buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [STRINGS] button to display various strings Voices. NEXT PAGE 32 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE The [EXPANSION/USER] button is used for calling up Custom Voices (your original Voices created with the Voice Set function) or Expansion Voices (additionally installed Voices). For details on Expansion Voices, refer to the section “Expanding Voices” (page 36). 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice. To call up the other display pages, press one of the [1 ] – [5 ] buttons or press the same VOICE button again. NOTE If you pressed the [ORGAN FLUTES] button in step 2, press the [I] (PRESET) button before proceeding to step 3. NOTE The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteristics, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. To listen to the demo phrases for each Voice Press the [8 ] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the demo, press the [8 ] button again. 5 Play the keyboard. Recalling your favorite Voices easily The sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first. By copying your favorite Preset Voices to the USER drive, you can quickly and easily recall them as needed. 1. Copy your favorite Voice from the Preset drive to the User drive. Refer to page 28 for details on the copy operation. 2. Press the [EXPANSION/USER] button to call up the User drive of the Voice Selection display, then press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously 1 Select a Voice for the Right 1 part (page 32). 2 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button. 3 3 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button to turn on the Right 2 part. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 33 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – NOTE You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [7 ] (INFO.) button. (Some Voices do not have an information display.) To close the information display, press the [EXIT] button. 4 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection display for the Right 2 part. 5 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice. 6 Play the keyboard. NOTE The Voice selected for RIGHT 1 and the Voice selected here are sounded simultaneously in a layer. You can save the settings to Registration Memory. See page 79. Playing Different Voices with your Left and Right Hands 1 Make sure that the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] and/or [RIGHT 2] buttons are turned on. 2 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn it on. 3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection display for the Left part. 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice. 5 Play the keyboard. The notes you play with your left hand sound one Voice (LEFT Voice selected above), while the notes you play with your right sound a different Voice or Voices (RIGHT 1 and/or 2 Voices). LEFT part 34 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual RIGHT 2 part RIGHT 1 part NOTE You can save the settings to Registration Memory. See page 79. Keyboard Parts Voices can be assigned independently to each of the three keyboard parts: Right 1, Right 2 and Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a rich, ensemble sound. Lower section of the keyboard Upper section of the keyboard 1 When the LEFT part is off, the RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices can be played over the entire keyboard. When the LEFT part is on, keys lower than F#2 (the Split Point) are set for playing the LEFT part and those higher than the Split Point are set for playing the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. You can confirm the currently selected part by checking which lamp of the PART SELECT buttons is lit. To select the desired keyboard part, press the corresponding part button. NOTE To change the Split Point, press: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] SPLIT POINT. For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, chapter 2. Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold) By turning on the PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLD] button, the LEFT part Voice is held even when the keys are released, desirable in some performance styles. Non-decaying Voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type Voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name — S.Art!, MegaVoice, Live!, Cool!, Sweet!, etc. For detailed explanation, refer to the Reference Manual. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 35 Voices – Playing the keyboard – Split Point (F#2) Expanding Voices Installing an Expansion Pack lets you add a variety of optional Voices and Styles to each Expansion category. The installed Voices and Styles can be selected like Preset Voices and Styles, allowing you to expand your music performance and creation possibilities. For information on obtaining Expansion Packs, refer to the PSR-S950 or PSR-S750 page at the Yamaha website (http://www.yamaha.com/). Depending on your locale, Expansion Packs may be available for expanding Voices and Styles unique or native to your particular area. Installing an Expansion Pack 1 2 Connect the USB flash memory which contains the Expansion Pack file to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [J] EXPANSION PACK INSTALLATION  TAB [E][F] USB 3 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Expansion Pack file. NOTICE This instrument allows you to install only one Expansion Pack. Installing an Expansion Pack will erase all the previously existing Expansion Pack data in the instrument. Make sure to keep a copy of the Expansion Pack data in a USB flash memory for future use. NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. NOTE 4 4 Press the [6 ] (INSTALL) button to install the data to the instrument. Follow the on-display instructions. 5 Press the [F] (YES) button when the message indicating completion of the install operation appears. The instrument will be restarted automatically. 6 Press the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons to see if the Expansion Pack data has been installed successfully. Expansion Voices or Styles can be found in the Expansion folder of the USER tab display. 36 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual You can call up the information for the selected Expansion Pack by pressing the [7 ] (INFO.) button. To close the information display, press the [EXIT] button. NOTICE The instrument will be restarted when installation is completed. Save all the data currently being edited beforehand, otherwise the data will be lost. NOTE If a message appears indicating that the drive does not have enough free space, move the files in the USER tab to the USB tab, then try installing again. Refer to page 28 for details on the Move operations. Song, Style or Registration Memory containing Expansion Voices or Styles Song, Style or Registration Memory containing any Expansion Voices or Styles will not sound properly or cannot be called up, if the Expansion Pack data does not exist in the instrument. We recommend that you write down the name of the Expansion Pack when you create the data (Song, Style or Registration Memory) using Expansion Voices or Styles, so that you can easily find and install the Expansion Pack when necessary. 1 Uninstalling an Expansion Pack 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – This operation deletes all the installed Expansion Voices or Styles. Call up the operation display then select an Expansion Pack file. [FUNCTION]  [J] EXPANSION PACK INSTALLATION  TAB [E][F] USER 2 2 Press the [5 ] (UNINSTALL) button to uninstall the Expansion Pack. Follow the on-display instructions. 3 Press the [F] (YES) button when the message indicating completion of the uninstall operation appears. NOTICE The instrument will be restarted when the uninstallation operation is completed. Save all data currently being edited beforehand, otherwise the data will be lost. The instrument will be restarted automatically. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 37 Transposing the Pitch of the Keyboard The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons transpose the overall pitch of the instrument (the keyboard sound, Style playback, Song playback, and so on) in semitone steps. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the transpose value to 0. NOTE The Transpose functions do not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices. NOTE You can also adjust the pitch for each part in the Mixing Console display called up via [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] TUNE [1 ] – [3 ] TRANSPOSE. The UPPER OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons allow the pitch of the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts to be shifted up or down by one octave. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the octave value to 0. Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument Although the entire pitch of this instrument is set to 440.0 Hz by default, you can fine-tune the pitch from [FUNCTION] [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [E][F] MASTER TUNE. You can also adjust the pitch for each part (keyboard parts, Style parts and Song parts) on the TUNE page of the Mixing Console display (page 86). For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Fine-tuning the pitch for each note individually Although the scale of this instrument is set to Equal Temperament by default, you can change the scale or fine-tune the pitch for each note from [FUNCTION] [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [E][F] SCALE TUNE. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 38 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Using the Wheels Using the Pitch Bend Wheel Use the PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. NOTE The effects caused by using the PITCH BEND Wheel are not applied to the rhythm parts of the Style. The maximum pitch bend range can be changed on the Mixing Console display: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] TUNE  [H] PITCH BEND RANGE. Using the Modulation Wheel The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. By default, this is applied to the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the MODULATION wheel down (toward you) decreases the depth of the effect, while moving it up (away from you) increases it. NOTE Depending on the selected Voice, the MODULATION wheel effect is not applied to the rhythm parts of the Style. NOTE To avoid accidentally applying modulation, make sure the MODULATION Wheel is set at minimum (down) position before you start playing. NOTE You can set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the keyboard part: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 2 MODULATION WHEEL. The effects caused by using the MODULATION wheel may not be applied to the LEFT part during Style playback depending on the Style setting. Applying Voice Effects You can apply some effects to the keyboard performance. The effects can be turned on or off by using the following buttons. These three effect systems are applied to the currently selected keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2, or LEFT). • HARMONY/ECHO The Harmony/Echo effects are applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody” on page 40. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 39 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 1 • TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When off, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. • SUSTAIN When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard with right-hand part (RIGHT 1 and 2) have a longer sustain. • MONO When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time). Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato. When this button is off, the part’s Voice played polyphonically. NOTE Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. • DSP/DSP VARI. With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. The [DSP] button is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part. Although many of the Voices have been automatically set to play the certain DSP types to match the particular Voice, you can change the type. On the Voice Selection display, select [6 ] (VOICE SET) TAB [E][F] EFFECT/EQ  [A]/[B] 2 DSP. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. The [DSP VARI.] button is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. You could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect. Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody (HARMONY/ECHO) Among the Voice Effects, Harmony is one of the most impressive. When the Harmony/Echo is on, the Harmony effect is applied to the right-hand Voices depending on the chord played with your left hand. 1 Turn the [HARMONY/ECHO] button on. 2 Turn on both the [ACMP] button and [SYNC START] button (page 43) and make sure that the RIGHT 1 part is on (page 32). 3 Play a chord with your left hand to start the Style (page 44) and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. NOTE Split Point Chord section In this example, harmony notes in the scale of C major (the chord played in the left hand) are automatically added to the notes played in the right-hand range of the keyboard. You can also use the Harmony effect with the Style stopped. Simply hold down a chord with your left hand and play a melody with your right. Although many of the Voices have been automatically set to play the certain Harmony/Echo types to match the particular Voice, you can change the type via [FUNCTION]  [G] (HARMONY/ECHO). For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 40 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Depending on the harmony/echo type, harmony will be applied even when the [ACMP] button is off. Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices You can create original Organ Flutes Voices by editing the Preset Organ Flutes Voices. Just as on a traditional organ, the original Voices can be created by increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages. The created Voices can be saved and called up anytime. 1 NOTE The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. The FOOTAGE Page of the Voice Set display of the Organ Flutes Voice is called up. 2 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 1 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the footage settings. The footage settings determine the basic sound of the Organ Flutes. The [1 ] buttons control two footages: 16’ and 5 1/3’. Pressing the [D] button switches between these two footages. For details on the VOLUME/ATTACK Page and EFFECT/EQ Page, see the Reference Manual on the website. If you want, you can select the Organ type, change the Rotary Speaker speed and adjust the Vibrato setting, by using the [A] – [C] and [F] – [H] buttons. [A]/[B] ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated. Sine produces a clean, clear sound and Vintage produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound. [C] ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the EFFECT/EQ Page), and the VOICE CONTROL [DSP] button is turned on. [F]/[G] VIBRATO Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. [H] VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high). [I] PRESETS Opens the File Selection display of the Organ Flutes Voices for selecting a preset Organ Flutes Voice. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 41 3 Press the [I] (PRESETS) button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice Selection display. Pressing the [6 ] button returns you to the Voice Set display. 4 Save your Organ Flutes Voice by following the procedure on page 26. NOTICE The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 1. Selecting GM/XG or other Voices from the panel: Voice Selection display  [8 ](UP)  [2 ] (P2) Effect-related settings • Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL • Selecting the Harmony/Echo type: [FUNCTION]  [G] HARMONY/ECHO Pitch-related settings 42 • Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument: [FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] MASTER TUNE • Scale Tuning: [FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] SCALE TUNE • Changing the part assignment of the TRANSPOSE buttons: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 3 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN Editing Voices (Voice Set): Voice Selection display  [6 ] (VOICE SET) Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.): [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] VOICE SET Editing Organ Flutes parameters: [ORGAN FLUTES]  TAB [E][F] VOLUME/ATTACK or EFFECT/EQ PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – The instrument features a variety of accompaniment and rhythmic backing patterns (called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others. The Style features Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by yourself. 1 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment Press one of the STYLE category selection buttons to call up the Style Selection display. The [EXPANSION/USER] button can be used to easily recall your favorite Styles and call up Expansion Styles (additionally installed Styles). The operations of both are the same as the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE category selection buttons. For instructions, refer to the section “Recalling your favorite Voices easily” (page 33) and “Expanding Voices” (page 36). 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Style. Pressing one of the [1 ] – [4 ] buttons or pressing the same STYLE button again can call up the other display page. 3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. The specific left-hand section of the keyboard (page 35) becomes the Chord section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected Style. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 2 43 4 Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start. 5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts. Try playing chords with your left hand and play melody with your right hand. NOTE For information on chords and Chord Fingering Type, see page 45. NOTE You can transpose the Style (accompaniment). See page 38. 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback. Audio Styles (PSR-S950 only) The +Audio Styles have been specially produced by adding audio recordings of studio musicians playing in various recording studios worldwide. This adds all the natural feel, ambience and warmth to the drums and percussion of the Style, giving your performance greater expressive potential. Specifically, it retains the subtle nuances and grooves that are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum/percussion kit. Yamaha Time Stretch Technology allows the audio to follow your tempo changes without changing pitch, so everything stays in perfect sync. 140% of the default tempo NOTE • If the tempo is set to over 140% of the default, the audio part is muted. • Keep in mind that the Audio Styles may take more time to load than others, and that they may have certain restrictions and differ in the specific functions that can be handled. In addition to Audio Styles, various other types of Style Characteristics are available. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 44 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Chords For users who are unfamiliar with chords, this handy chart features common chords for your quick reference. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  Indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 Changing the Chord Fingering Type By changing the chord fingering type, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment even if you don’t press all of the notes which comprise a chord. Chord fingering type can be changed from: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] CHORD FINGERING. Following types can be selected, for example. • Single Finger This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two or three fingers. Major chord Minor chord Seventh chord Minor seventh chord Press the root key only. Simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. Simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. • AI Full Keyboard Playing just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands – like playing the piano – produces appropriate accompaniment. You don’t have to worry about specifying the chords. (Depending on the song arrangement, AI Full Keyboard may not always produce appropriate accompaniment.) For other types, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 45 Operating Style Playback To Start/Stop Playing • [START/STOP] button The rhythm channels start playing back as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. To stop playback, press the button again. • [SYNC START] button This puts Style playback in standby. When [ACMP] is on, the Style starts playing back by playing a chord with your left hand, and when [ACMP] is off, the Style (only rhythm channels) starts playing back by pressing any note on the keyboard. During Style playback, pressing this button stops playing and puts the playback in standby. • [SYNC STOP] button This is effective only when the [ACMP] button is on. By pressing this button to enable Sync Stop, the Style plays back only when you play keys in the chord section of the keyboard. NOTE When the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” Synchro Stop cannot be turned on. To change the fingering mode: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] CHORD FINGERING. • INTRO [I] – [III] buttons The instrument features three different Intro sections to add an introduction to your performance. After pressing one of the INTRO [I] – [III] buttons, start playback. When the Intro finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section. • ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons The instrument features three different Ending sections to add an ending to your performance. When you press one of the ENDING [I] – [III] buttons while Style is playing back, the Style will automatically stop after the ending is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. NOTE If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button when the Style is playing, a fill-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit [I]. About the lamp status of the section buttons (INTRO/MAIN VARIATION/BREAK/ENDING) • Red: The section is currently selected. • Red (flashing): The section will be played next, following the currently selected section. * The Main [A] – [D] buttons also flash red during fill-in playback. • Green: The section contains data but is not currently selected. • Off: The section contains no data and cannot be played. 46 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Changing Pattern Variation (Sections) During Style Playback Each Style features four different Main sections, four Fill-in sections and a Break section. By using these sections effectively, you can easily make your performance sound more dynamic and professional. The section can be freely changed while the Style is playing back. • MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Main section (the button lights in red). Each is an accompaniment pattern of a few measures and it plays indefinitely. Pressing the selected MAIN VARIATION button again plays an appropriate fill-in pattern to spice up the rhythm and break the repetition. Press the selected Main section (lit in red) again. AUTO FILL function 2 When the [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned on, pressing any of the Main [A] – [D] buttons as you play automatically plays a fill-in section. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – The fill-in of the selected Main section plays (flashes in red). • [BREAK] button This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment. Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section. Adjusting the Tempo • TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons By pressing the TEMPO [-] or [+] button, you can decrease/increase the tempo over a range of 5 – 500. While the TEMPO pop-up is shown on the display, you can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. NOTE This operation is common for Song playback (page 54). In the case of Audio Styles (page 44), the tempo of 140% of the default is shown under the current tempo. Pressing the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons simultaneously resets the tempo to the default value. • [TAP TEMPO] button During Style playback, you can change the tempo by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. When the Style is stopped, tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) starts Style playback at the tempo you tapped. Fading In/Out • [FADE IN/OUT] button This produces smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting/stopping playback. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when playback is stopped and press the [START/STOP] button to start playback with a fade in. To stop playback with a fade out, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button during playback. NOTE This operation also applies to Song playback (page 54). PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 47 Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (Repertoire) The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings for the currently selected Style. We recommend that you import Music Finder Records before using the Repertoire function (page 73). 1 2 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display (steps 1 – 2 on page 43). Press the [5 ] (REPERTOIRE) button. NOTE The settings shown here are Music Finder Records. You can choose additional settings by using the Music Finder feature (page 73). Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in the display. 3 3 48 Use the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons to select the desired panel setting. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any panel settings in the Repertoire function. Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting) One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you. 1 Select a Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 43). 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the current Style, it also automatically turns on [ACMP] and [SYNC START], so that you can immediately start playing the Style. 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts. Each Style has four One Touch Setting setups. Press other ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons to try out other setups. NOTE You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A – D). The Main sections A, B, C and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. To use the OTS Link function, turn the [OTS LINK] button on. NOTE By the OTS LINK TIMING function, you can change the timing in which the One Touch Settings change along with MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] changes. Refer to the Reference Manual on the website. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 49 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 Confirming the One Touch Setting contents You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to the currently selected Style. 1 In the Style Selection display, press the [7 ] (OTS INFO.) button to call up the Information display. NOTE 2 2 You can also call up the Information display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then pressing one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display. Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender) This convenient function “recommends” optimum Styles for the song you want to perform, based on the rhythm you play for one or two measures. 1 In the Style selection display (page 43), press the [8 ] (RECOMMEND) button to call up the STYLE RECOMMENDER display. The keyboard is divided by B1 key into two sections as below. The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat) are assigned to the left of the B1 key while the Piano sound is assigned to the right. NEXT PAGE 50 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the Style Recommender function to find the Style. 2-1 Press the [J] (START) button sets the instrument to standby, waiting for your playing, and simultaneously turns on the metronome. Pressing the [J] button toggles between START and CANCEL. NOTE To cancel the operation, press the [J] (CANCEL) buttons. Adjusting the tempo and beat of the metronome The tempo can be adjusted by the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons, and the beat can be set by pressing the [E] (METRONOME) button in the STYLE RECOMMENDER display. 2-2 Play the rhythm you have in mind on the Drum or Piano section for one or two measures along with the metronome. The timing at which you play the keys is analyzed over several seconds, then playback of the most recommended Style starts. In addition, the candidates of the other recommended Styles are listed in the display. NOTE The instrument only analyzes the timing of your keyboard play. Tempo, pitches and note length are ignored. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – • Example 1: Play the following rhythm on the Piano section. Bossa Nova or similar Styles may be listed in the display. • Example 2: Play the following rhythm on the Drum section. Snare Kick An 8-Beat rhythm or similar Styles may be listed in the display. 3 Select the desired Style from the list by using the [1 ] – [6 ] buttons. Listen to the Styles by changing the sections (page 47), playing the chord on the Piano section and adjusting the tempo (page 47). If the Style called up doesn’t match the song you want to play, press the [J] (RETRY) buttons, then return to step 2-2. 4 When you’ve found a Style you’re satisfied with, press the [7 ]/[8 ] (OK) button to exit from the Style Recommender display. The Voices assigned to the keyboard return to the Voices for Right 1, 2 and Left as before. 5 Play the keyboard along with the Style you just found. 2 NOTE The Style is played back at the tempo you set in step 2 (or 3), but it can be adjusted. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 51 Turning Style Parts On/Off and Changing Voices A Style contains the following channels below. You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays. Style channels • RHY1/2 (Rhythm 1/2): These are the basic parts of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. • BASS: The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the Style. • CHD1/2 (Chord 1/2): These are rhythmic chord backing parts, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices. • PAD: This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc. • PHR1/2 (Phrase1/2): These parts are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. (PSR-S950) • AUDIO: This is an audio part of the Audio Style (page 44). 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF (STYLE) displays. (The PSR-S750 has only one display.) On the PSR-S950, pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again calls up the second CHANNEL ON/OFF page (STYLE 2/2). 2 2 Press the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn the channels on or off. To listen to only one channel by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. NOTE You can save the settings here to Registration Memory. See page 79. Changing the Voice for each channel If necessary, press the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to change the Voice for the corresponding channel. The Voice Selection display is called up from which you can select the Voice to be used for the channel. See page 32. NOTE The Audio channel does not have a Voice and, hence, cannot be changed. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the CHANNEL ON/OFF display. NOTE When the Main display is shown, the CHANNEL ON/OFF display cannot be closed. 52 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Style and Keyboard You can adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the BALANCE (1/2) display. 2 2 2 Adjust the Style volume by using the [2 ] buttons and the keyboard volume by using the [5 ] – [7 ] buttons. Using the [1 ] – [7 ] buttons, you can adjust the volume of Song, Style, Multi Pad, MIC (for the PSR-S950) and keyboard parts. NOTE When the Main display is shown, the BALANCE display cannot be closed. NOTE 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the BALANCE display. In the Mixing Console display, you can adjust the volume for each Style part. See page 87. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 2. Selecting the Chord Fingering type: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] CHORD FINGERING Style playback related settings: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] STYLE SETTING Split Point settings: [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] SPLIT POINT Memorizing the Original One Touch Setting: [MEMORY] + ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator): [FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [B] STYLE CREATOR • Realtime Recording:  TAB [E][F] BASIC • Step Recording:  TAB [E][F] EDIT  [G] STEP REC • Style Assembly:  TAB [E][F] ASSEMBLY • Editing the rhythmic feel:  TAB [E][F] GROOVE • Editing data for each channel:  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL • Making Style File Format settings:  TAB [E][F] PARAMETER PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 53 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 1 3 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – For the PSR-S950/S750, “Song” refers to the MIDI songs which include preset songs, commercially available MIDI format files, etc. Not only can you play back a Song and listen to it, but you can also play the keyboard along with Song playback and record your own performance as a Song. Playback of Songs You can play back the following types of Songs. • Preset Songs (in the PRESET Page of the Song Selection display) • Your own recorded Songs (see page 60 for instructions on recording) • Commercially available Song data: SMF (Standard MIDI File) NOTE For instructions on the playback of audio songs (files), see page 64. NOTE 1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. For information on compatible data formats, refer to page 6. 2 2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the desired Song. If you want to playback Song in the USB flash memory, connect the USB flash memory containing MIDI Song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand. 3 Select the desired Song by using the [A] – [J] buttons. You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. NEXT PAGE 54 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. NOTE You can instantly jump back to the Main display by double-clicking on one of the [A] – [J] buttons. 4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Queuing the next Song for playback While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during live performance. Select the Song you want to play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [8 ] (NEXT CANCEL) button. 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. Operations During Playback • Synchro Start .........You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. While playback is stopped, hold down the SONG [J] (STOP) button and press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. To cancel the Synchro Start function, hold down the SONG [J] (STOP) button and press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button once again. You can adjust the Song volume balance between the Song and Keyboard. See page 53. In the Mixing Console display, you can adjust the volume for each Song part. See page 87. • Pause ........................Press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. Pressing it again resumes Song playback from the current position. You can also turn specific part(s) on or off. See page 57. NOTE NOTE • Rewind/Fast Forward .....................................Press the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button once to move back/forward one measure. Hold the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button to scroll backward/forward continuously. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 55 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 Pressing the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number) in the display. While the Song Position pop-up is shown on the display, you can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. NOTE For Songs not containing Phrase Marks Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data, which indicates a specific location in the Song. For Songs containing Phrase Marks You can switch between BAR and PHRASE MARK by pressing the [E] button. • Adjusting the Tempo Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 47. • Fading In/Out Same procedure as with Style. See page 47. NOTE You can transpose the Song playback. See page 38. Displaying Music Notation (Score) You can view the music notation (score) of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice. 1 NOTE The instrument can display the music notation of your recorded Songs. Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54). NOTE 2 Press the [SCORE] button to call up the Score display. You can look through the entire notation by using the TAB [E][F] buttons when the Song playback is stopped. Upon starting playback, the “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position. The instrument cannot display the music notation of commercially-available music data excepting those data that specifically allow score display. NOTE The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. You can change the displayed notation style by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For details, refer to the Reference manual on the website. 56 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Displaying Lyrics (Text) When the selected Song contains lyrics data, you can view it on the instrument’s display during playback. Even if the Song doesn’t contain lyrics data, you can view the lyrics on the display by loading the text file (.txt) created on a computer via USB flash memory. Displaying text enables various useful possibilities, such as the showing of lyrics, chord names, and text notes. 1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54). 2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to call up the Lyrics display. When the Song data contains lyrics data, the lyrics are shown on the display. You can look through the entire lyrics by using the TAB [E][F] buttons when the Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the color of the lyrics changes, indicating the current position. When you want to view the text file created on your computer, press the [5 ]/[6 ] (TEXT FILE) button to select the desired text file, then press the [1 ] (TEXT) button to display the selected file. For more information about the Lyrics display, refer to the Reference manual on the website. NOTE Information about Text File selection can be memorized to the Registration Memory (page 79). NOTE (PSR-S950) The Lyrics (text) can be displayed on an external monitor. See page 90. Turning Song Channels On/Off A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF (SONG) display. 2 2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] button to turn each channel on or off. If you want to play back only one particular channel (solo playback), press and hold down one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channel to SOLO. Only the selected channel is turned on and others are off. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 57 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 Practicing the Right-hand Part with Guide Functions You can mute the right-hand part to try practicing the part. Here, the explanations apply when you practice the right-hand part with Follow Lights of the Guide functions. In the Score display, Follow Lights indicates the notes you should play. You can also practice at your own pace — since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. 1 Select a Song and call up the Score display (page 56). 2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 2 3 3 Press the SONG [TR 1] button to mute the right-hand part. The indicator of the [TR 1] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. 4 IMPORTANT Usually, CH 1 is assigned to [TR 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TR 2] button, and CH 3 – 16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TR] button. Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Practice the muted part while viewing the Score display. After your practice, turn the [GUIDE] button off. Other guide functions There are additional functions in the Guide features, for practicing the timing of playing the keys (Any Key), for Karaoke or for practicing a song at your own pace (Your Tempo). [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING  [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 58 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Repeat Playback The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. To repeat a Song, turn the [REPEAT] button on and playback the desired Song. Turning the [REPEAT] button off cancels Repeat playback. NOTE You can play multiple Songs repeatedly: [FUNCTION] [B] SONG SETTING [H] REPEAT MODE. Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 54). 2 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. 3 Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly. 3 NOTE Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. NOTE Top of the song A B End of the song When you want to repeat from the top of the song to the middle of the song: 1 Press the [REPEAT] button, then start Song playback. 2 Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). 4 To stop playback, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button. The Song position will return to Point A. 5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped 1. Press the [H] (FF) button to advance to the Point A location. 2. Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A. 3. Press the [H] (FF) button to advance to the Point B location. 4. Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 59 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 1 Recording Your Performance You can record your own performances and save them as a Song file to the USER drive or USB flash memory. Two different recording methods are available: Quick recording which lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance, and Multi Track recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels. And since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your Songs, too. Quick Recording ..........see section below You can record all parts of your performance at once or a specific part (righthand, lefthand or Style playback). This is also an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. NOTE Audio data (the rhythm channels created via the audio data of Audio Style, Audio Link Multi Pad and audio songs) cannot be recorded to the MIDI Songs. NOTE For instructions on the recording of audio songs (files), see page 67. Multi Track Recording ..........page 62 With this method, you can record data to each channel independently, one by one. You can also freely change the channel/part assignments with the Multi Track recording. If you want to record on a USB flash memory, read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” (page 92) then follow the instructions below after connecting the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Quick Recording Before starting recording, make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance — selecting a Voice, Style, etc. 1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. 2 Press the SONG [REC] button. NOTE To cancel the recording, press the [J] (STOP) button. Recording a specific part In place of step 2, pressing the SONG [TR1] (or [TR2]) button while holding the [REC] button enables you to record only the right-hand (or left-hand) part. Pressing the [EXTRA TR] button while holding the [REC] button enables recording of only Style playback. NEXT PAGE 60 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 3 Start recording. NOTE Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, start Style playback or start Multi Pad playback. When recording without Style playback, turning the [METRONOME] on makes your recording sessions much more efficient. The Metronome tempo can be adjusted by the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons. 4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. For Quick Recording, each part will be recorded to the following channels. Keyboard parts: Ch. 1-3 Multi Pad parts: Ch. 5-8 Style parts: Ch. 9-16 5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. IMPORTANT 6 Save the recorded performance as a Song. NOTE For details on the saving operation, refer to “Saving a File” on page 26. The recorded Song can be saved in the Song Selection display. 6-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. NOTICE 6-2 Select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the Song by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 6-3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button. The naming display is called up. 6-4 Enter the file name (page 30). The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. NOTE If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. 6-5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 61 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 Multi Track Recording Before starting recording, make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance — selecting a Voice, Style, etc. 1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. 2 While holding down the SONG [REC] button, press the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channels to “REC.” If you want to record the Right 1 part to channel 1, for example, press the [1 ] button while holding down the [REC] button to set the channel 1 to “REC.” Then use the [C]/[D] buttons to select “RIGHT 1” in step 3. 3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to assign the desired part for the channel to be recorded. 4 Start recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, start Style playback or start Multi Pad playback. 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. 6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. 7 Re-select other channels and record other parts by repeating the steps 2 to 6. NEXT PAGE 62 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE To cancel the recording, press the [J] (STOP) button. 8 Save the recorded performance as a Song. NOTE For details on saving, refer to “Saving a File” on page 26. The recorded Song can be saved in the Song Selection display. 8-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 8-2 Select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the Song by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 8-3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button. NOTICE The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. The naming display is called up. 8-4 Enter the file name (page 30). 8-5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the file. NOTE If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 3. Editing Music Notation settings: [SCORE]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons Editing Lyrics/Text display settings: [LYRICS/TEXT]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons Using the Auto Accompaniment features with Song Playback: [ACMP]  STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START]  SONG [J] + [F/K]  STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] Song Playback related parameters: [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING • Keyboard and vocal practice using the Guide function:  [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE • Playing backing parts with the Performance Assistant Technology:  [8 ] P.A.T. Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator): [FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [A] SONG CREATOR • Recording melodies (Step Recording):  TAB [E][F] 1-16 • Recording chords (Step Recording):  TAB [E][F] CHORD • Re-recording a specific section — Punch In/ Out:  TAB [E][F] REC MODE • Editing channel events:  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL • Editing chord events, notes, System Exclusive events and lyrics:  TAB [E][F] CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 63 4 USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files – The convenient USB Audio function allows you to play back audio files (WAVE or MP3) saved to a USB flash memory device — directly from the instrument. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio files (.wav) to a USB flash memory device, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to enjoy as well. Playing Back Audio Files Try playing back audio files from USB flash memory on this instrument. NOTE The audio files take a slightly longer time to load than other files. File formats that can be played back .wav .mp3 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64 – 320 kbps and variable bit rate, mono/stereo PSR-S950 PSR-S750 PSR-S950 NOTE While selecting the desired WAVE file in the Audio Link function (step 6 on page 71), the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button does not function. NOTE For instructions on the playback of MIDI songs, see page 54. NOTE DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files cannot be played back. 1 2 Connect the USB flash memory containing the audio files to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. 3 3 Press the [H] (FILE) button to display the audio files saved to the connected USB flash memory. NEXT PAGE 64 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the file you want to listen to. 5 5 Press the [8 ] (AUDIO PLAY) button to start playback. The display automatically returns to the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. To stop playback, press the [2 ] (STOP) button. 4 USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files – 6 NOTICE Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash memory or turn the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash memory data. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 65 Playback-related Operations Elapsed playback time Total playback time Basic Operations via the number [] buttons [3 ] PLAY/PAUSE Starts or pauses playback at the current position. [2 ] STOP Stops playback. [4 ] PREV. Pressing this changes the file to the previous one; holding it moves continuously back through the current file (in seconds). [5 ] NEXT Pressing this changes the file to the next one; holding it moves continuously forward through the current file (in seconds). [6 ] (PSR-S950) AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current audio file. [8 ] (PSR-S750) A-B Repeat Playback via the [C] (A B) button The specified section (between the A and B points) can be played back repeatedly. 1. To set the A point, press the [C] button when playback reaches to the desired point. The time set as the A point is shown in at “A [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the first wedge mark in the playback progress bar. 2. To set the B point, press the [C] button again when playback reaches to the desired point. The time set as the B point is shown in at “B [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the second wedge mark in the playback progress bar. The specified A-B section of the audio file will now play back repeatedly. 3. To cancel Repeat playback, press the [C] button again. Repeat Playback mode via the [D] (REPEAT MODE) button • OFF Plays through the selected file, then stops. • SINGLE Plays through the selected file repeatedly. • ALL Continues playback through all the files in the current folder repeatedly. • RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all files in the current folder. NEXT PAGE 66 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Advanced Features only for PSR-S950 [7] TIME STRETCH Adjusts the playback speed by stretching/compressing the audio, compared to an original speed of 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo. NOTE • The value can be adjusted from 70% to 140%. • Time Stretch cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate. [8] PITCH SHIFT Shifts the key in semitones. NOTE Pitch Shift cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate. [H] VOCAL CANCEL Cancels or attenuates the center position of the stereo sound. This lets you sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing, since the vocal sound is usually at the center of the stereo image in most recordings. Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Song (MIDI) and Audio Song Pressing the [BALANCE] button once or twice calls up the BALANCE (2/2) display. In this display, you can adjust the volume balance between the Song (MIDI) and Audio Song by using the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons. When this is set to CENTER, the levels of the Song and Audio Song are equal. To instantly reset the balance to CENTER, press the [2 ] and [3 ] buttons simultaneously. BALANCE (2/2) Recording Your Performance as Audio Try recording your performance as audio data (WAVE file) to a USB flash memory. Sounds that can be recorded: • Sounds that are generated via all the keyboard parts, Song parts, Style parts, and Multi Pad parts. • Sounds of the portable audio player that are input via the [AUX IN] jack. • (PSR‐S950) Sounds that are input via the [MIC/LINE IN] jack, such as a microphone, guitar or other audio devices. Maximum amount of recording time: NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. NOTE Data that cannot be recorded includes: Audio Styles, Songs protected by copyright (such as Preset Songs), Audio Link Multi Pads and the metronome sound. NOTE • 80 minutes per recording, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the USB flash memory. For instructions on MIDI recording, see page 60. The recorded data using this function is saved as: • Stereo WAVE data • 44.1 kHz sample rate/16 bit resolution 1 Connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 67 USB Audio – Playback and Recording Audio Files – 4 2 Set the desired Voice, etc. which you want to use for your performance. 3 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. 4 NOTE The USB flash memory of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB flash memories are connected. Press the [1 ] (REC) button to enter recording standby. The [PLAY/PAUSE] button flashes. Recordable time 5 Start recording by pressing the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) button, then start your performance. The elapsed recording time is shown in the display while recording. Elapsed recording time 6 Stop recording by pressing the [2 ] (STOP) button. Recorded data is automatically saved to the USB flash memory as a file with the name automatically set. 7 Press the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. To see the file of the recorded performance in the File Selection display, press the [H] (FILE) button. NOTICE Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash memory or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash memory data or the recording data. NOTE The recording operation continues, even if you close the USB AUDIO PLAYER display by pushing the [EXIT] button. Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display again, then stop the recording by pressing the [2 ] (STOP) button. NOTE Even if you make a mistake in your performance, you cannot overwrite an existing file. Delete the recorded file on the File Selection display, then record your performance again. 68 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 5 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short prerecorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads are grouped in Banks of four each. The instrument features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different musical genres.Moreover, the Multi Pad Audio Link function allows you to create a new pad with your WAVE data (Audio data) to play back during your performance. Playing the Multi Pads Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display, then select the desired bank. Select pages using the [1 ] – [6 ] buttons that correspond to “P1, P2...” in the display or pressing the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button repeatedly, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired bank. 2 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons to play a Multi Pad phrase. The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 1) starts playing back in its entirety at the currently set tempo. You can even play two or more Multi Pads at the same time. 5 NOTE There are two types of Multi Pad data. Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end. Others will be played back repeatedly (loop). NOTE Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. 3 3 Press the [STOP] button to stop playback of the Multi Pad(s). If you want to stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad(s) you wish to stop. About the color of the Multi Pads • Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase). • Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back. • Red (flashing): Indicates that the corresponding pad is in standby (Synchro Start). PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 69 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 1 Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function You can start the Multi Pad playback by playing any key or by starting Style playback. 1 While holding the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button, press the desired button or buttons from [1] – [4]. The corresponding buttons flash, indicating the Standby status. To cancel this status, execute the same operation, or press only the [STOP] button to cancel the Standby status of all Pads. 2 Start playback of the Multi Pad. • When [ACMP] is off, press any note, or play back a Style. • When [ACMP] is on, play a chord with your left hand, or play back a Style. • When two or more Multi Pads are pressed in step 1, press any of them to start playback of them simultaneously. If you execute step 1 during playback of Style or Song: To start playback of the corresponding Pad at the top of the next bar, press any note (when [ACMP] is off) or play a chord with your left hand (when [ACMP] is on). Using Chord Match Many of the Multi Pad phrases are melodic or chordal and you can have these phrases automatically change chords along with the chords you play with your left hand. When the [ACMP] is on or LEFT part is on, simply play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads — Chord Match changes the pitch to match the chords you play. Keep in mind that some Multi Pads are not affected by Chord Match. Chord Section In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try out other various chord types while playing the Multi Pads. 70 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Using WAVE Files for the Multi Pads You can use WAVE files, created via the USB Audio function (page 67) or commercially-available ones for the Multi Pad playback. To do this, you need to create an Audio Link Multi Pad by linking the WAVE files to each of the Multi Pads. NOTE Audio Link Multi Pads are neither created nor played back during playback, recording standby or recording of audio files. For details on the audio files, see page 64. Creating an Audio Link Multi Pad 1 Prepare the WAVE files in the USB flash memory. NOTE 2 Connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 3 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. 4 Press the [7 ] (AUDIO LINK) button to call up the Multi Pad Audio Link display. You will need to press the [C] (NEW BANK) button in the Multi Pad Audio Link display to create an Audio Pad, if an Audio Link Multi Pad has been selected when you pressed the [7 ] (AUDIO LINK) button. Otherwise, you are simply re-selecting the link in the selected Audio Link Multi Pad. NOTE A WAVE file cannot be linked to a MIDI Multi Pad. 5 5 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 5 Select the desired Pad by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. The WAVE display appears. 6 Select the desired WAVE file by using the [A] – [J] buttons. To confirm the information of the selected WAVE file: Press the [7 ] (INFO.) button to call up the information window. You can confirm the information (file name, title name, time and sample rate, etc.). Press the [F] (OK) button to close it. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Multi Pad Audio Link display. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 71 8 If desired, adjust the level of each WAVE file by using the [1 ] – [4 ] buttons. You can adjust the volume while playing a Multi Pad phrase by pressing the corresponding MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons. To confirm the path of the selected WAVE file: Press the [H] (INFO.) button to call up the information window. Press the [F] (OK) button to close it. 9 10 If you want to link other WAVE files to other pads, repeat steps 5 to 8. Save the settings as a Multi Pad Bank. NOTICE Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display, then execute the Save operation. The Link and Volume settings will be saved. 11 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Multi Pad Audio Link display. The setting will be lost if you select another Audio Link Multi Pad or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. The newly created Audio Link Multi Pad is marked with “Audio Link” at the upper left of the file name. If you want to change the Link setting: Select the desired Audio Link Multi Pad, then execute the same operations as steps 4 to 11. Playing the Audio Link Multi Pads You can play the Multi Pad to which the WAVE file is assigned by selecting them in the USER or USB page of the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. Although you can play via the same operations in page 69, note the following limitations. • Make sure to connect the USB flash memory including the corresponding WAVE files. • Automatic repeat playback is not available. • Only one Pad can be played back at once. • Chord Match cannot be applied. NOTE Audio files (WAVE files) take a slightly longer time than MIDI files to load. NOTE When the link to the WAVE file is cut (for example, when not connecting the USB flash memory which includes the corresponding WAVE files, etc.), a “Not Found!” is indicated above the Pad name. NOTE The lamp is off when the corresponding pad contains no data (phrase). Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 5. 72 Multi Pad creating (Multi Pad Creator): [FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [C] MULTI PAD CREATOR Multi Pad editing: Multi Pad Bank Selection display  [8 ] (EDIT) PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – This feature lets you call up the panel settings ideal for your performance simply by selecting a “Record,” music genre or song title. If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don't know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate, use this convenient function. Moreover, by registering the Song, audio and Style file saved in various locations into Music Finder, the instrument can easily call up the desired Song, audio and Style file from the corresponding Record. NOTE Loading panel settings (Records) As a factory default, some sample records (panel settings) are provided in the Music Finder. By downloading many panel settings from the Yamaha website and loading them to the instrument, you can use the Music Finder function more conveniently and effectively. Before using the Music Finder function, we recommend that you load the panel settings by following the instructions below. 1. Download the Music Finder panel settings file from the website to the USB flash memory. http://download.yamaha.com/ 2. Connect the USB flash memory which contains the panel settings file to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. NOTICE Loading the panel settings to the instrument automatically overwrites all your records (panel settings, Song, audio and Style files shown in the MUSIC FINDER display). Make sure that all important data has been saved to the USER or USB in the File Section display (as described in step 4 above). 3. Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. 4 4. Press the [7 ] (FILES) button to call up the File Selection display. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 73 6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 6 Music Finder 5. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the USB display containing the panel settings file downloaded from the website. 6. Press the button which corresponds to the file to display the message for selecting REPLACE/APPEND of the panel settings. 7. Press the [F] (REPLACE) button to delete all records currently in the instrument and replace them with the records of the selected file. Press the [G] (YES) button at the confirmation prompt. 8. Press the [F] (YES) button in the message display (indicating completion of the replace operation) to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. By checking the number of records in the MUSIC FINDER display, you can confirm the record has been replaced. The number of records 74 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE Even after replacing the Music Finder records, you can reset them to their original factory settings by selecting the “MusicFinderPreset” file in PRESET display of step 5. Selecting a Record (Your Desired Music Genre) 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. In the ALL display, all the records are shown. Shows the song title and information of the Style assigned to the panel settings. 2 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Panel Settings. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. Not only does this select the desired Panel Settings, it also automatically turns on [ACMP] and [SYNC START]. Sorting the records Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records by MUSIC, STYLE, BEAT and TEMPO. Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending). When sorting records by MUSIC, you can use the [1 ] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. When sorting records by STYLE, you can use the [4 ]/[5 ] button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [] and [] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. Play chords in the left-hand section (page 35) of the keyboard to start the Style. NOTE If you want to avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record, set the Style Tempo function to LOCK or HOLD by pressing the [I] (STYLE TEMPO) button in the Music Finder display. Setting to LOCK can also avoid inadvertent changing of the Tempo while Style playback is stopped and another record is selected. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 75 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 3 6 Finding Your Desired Record (Panel Settings) via Search You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder. 1 From the ALL page of the MUSIC FINDER display, press the [6 ] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display. 2 Enter the search criteria. [A] [B] [C] MUSIC KEYWORD STYLE Searches by song name. Pressing the [A] button calls up the pop-up window to enter the song name. To clear the entered Music, press the [F] (CLEAR) button. Searches by keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up the pop-up window to enter the keyword. To clear the entered Keyword, press the [G] (CLEAR) button. Searches by Style. Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Search display. To clear the entered Style, press the [H] (CLEAR) button. [D] BEAT Specifies the time signature for the search. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY. [E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location (the tab of the upper part of the MUSIC FINDER display) for searching. [1 ] ALL CLEAR Clears all entered search criteria. [3 ] TEMPO FROM Sets a tempo range to which the search will be limited. [4 ] TEMPO TO [5 ]/ [6 ] GENRE NOTE For instructions on entering characters, refer to page 30. NOTE You can search several different Keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. NOTE If you select a beat of 2/4 or 6/8, a Style suitable for performing a song in 2/4 and 6/8 beat can be searched, but the actual Style is created by using a 4/ 4 beat. Selects the desired music genre. To cancel searching, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. 3 NOTE Press the [8 ] (START SEARCH) button to start the search. The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. 76 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual If you wish to search another criteria, press the [6 ] (SEARCH 2) button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display. Registering a Song, Audio or Style File By registering Song, audio or Style files in various locations (Preset, User and USB) into Music Finder, the instrument can call up the file easily from the song title. 1 Call up the file. For Song or Style files: 1-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] or one of the STYLE category selection buttons to display the File Selection display. 1-2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the desired file. NOTE If you want to register files in the USB flash memory, connect the USB flash memory containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE Before using a USB flash memory, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Flash Memory” on page 92. For audio files: 1-1 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. 1-2 Press the [H] (FILE) button to display audio files in the connected USB 6 flash memory. Press the [A] – [J] button corresponding to the desired file. Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 2 3 3 Press the [6 ] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file to Music Finder. The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 77 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to execute the registration. Press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration. 5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC column while (SONG), (AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in the Style column. Recalling the Registered File from Music Finder You can recall the registered files in the same way as done in the “Selecting a Record (Your Desired Music Genre)” (page 75) and “Finding Your Desired Record (Panel Settings) via Search” (page 76). • To play back the recalled Song file, press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button in the SONG buttons or start playing the keyboard after selecting the SONG record. You can stop playback by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) button. • To play back the recalled audio file, press the [J] (F PLAY) button in the MUSIC FINDER display after selecting the AUDIO record. You can stop playback by pressing the [J] (J STOP) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. • To play a Style, start playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. You can stop playback by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. NOTE If you want to play back the files in the USB flash memory, connect the USB flash memory containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand. NOTE When searching Song or audio (page 76), it is necessary to set the search criteria as follows. STYLE: Blank BEAT: ANY TEMPO: “---” - “---” Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 6. 78 Creating a set of favorite Records: [MUSIC FINDER]  TAB [E][F] ALL  [H] ADD TO FAVORITE Editing Records: [MUSIC FINDER]  [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) Saving the Record as a single file: [MUSIC FINDER]  [7 ] (FILES) PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Registration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (file). Registering Your Panel Setups 1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. 2 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section. The display for selecting the items to be registered appears. NOTE Refer to the Registration section of the “Parameter Chart” in the Data List for information on the parameters that are contained in each item. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website (See page 7). Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 7 3 3 Determine the items you want to register. Select the desired item by using the [2 ] – [7 ] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [8 ] (MARK ON)/[8 ] (MARK OFF) buttons. To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 79 4 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons to which you wish to memorize the panel setup. NOTICE If you select the button whose lamp is lit in red or green here, the panel setup previously memorized to the button will be erased and replaced by the new settings. The memorized button becomes red, which indicates the number button contains data and its number is selected. About the lamp status • Red: Data registered and currently selected • Green: Data registered but not currently selected • Off: No data registered 5 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1 – 4. The registered panel setups can be recalled by simply pressing the desired number button. NOTE The panel setups registered in the numbered buttons are maintained even when you turn off the power. If you want to delete all the eight current panel setups, turn the power on while holding the B5 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file You can save all eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file. Bank 04 Bank 03 Bank 02 Bank 01 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the Registration Bank Selection Display. 2 2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file. For instructions on saving, refer to page 26. 80 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Recalling a Registered Panel Setup The saved Registration Memory Bank files can be recalled by using the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons or the following procedure. 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select a Bank. You can also use the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons, or the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button to select a Bank. 3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) in the Registration Memory section. NOTE When recalling the setups including file selection of Song, Style, text, etc. from a USB flash memory, make sure that the appropriate USB flash memory including the registered Song/Style is connected into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE Turning the [FREEZE] button on disables recall of specific item(s). To use this function, you need to select the item(s) not to be recalled by accessing [FUNCTION] [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] FREEZE. Confirming the Registration Memory Information You can call up the information display to confirm which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons of a Registration Memory Bank. 1. Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration Bank Selection display, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank. NOTE If a certain Voice part is set to off, the Voice name for corresponding part is shown in gray (on the PSR-S950); on the PSR-S750, the Voice part name for the corresponding part is shown in gray. 2. Press the [7 ] (INFO.) button to call up the information display. 3 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 7 By using the TAB [E][F] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages: information for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons. NOTE If a certain Voice part is set to off, the Voice name for corresponding part is shown in gray (on the PSR-S950); on the PSR-S750, the Voice part name for the corresponding part is shown in gray. 3. Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 7. Disabling recall of specific items: [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] FREEZE Calling up Registration Memory numbers in order: [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 81 8 Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing – By connecting a microphone to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4” phone jack), you can enjoy singing along with your keyboard performance or with Song playback. The instrument outputs your vocals through the built-in speakers. Moreover, you can automatically apply various Vocal Harmony effects to your voice as you sing. Connecting a Microphone 1 Before turning on the power of the instrument, set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position. NOTE Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone. NOTE Always set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to minimum when nothing is connected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise even when nothing is connected. 2 Connect the microphone to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. 3 3 4 Set the [LINE MIC] switch to “MIC.” Turn on the power of the instrument. NEXT PAGE 82 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 5 (If necessary, turn on the microphone.) Adjust the [INPUT VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone. Adjust the control while checking the SIGNAL lamp. Make sure to adjust the control so the lamp lights in green. Make sure that the lamp does not light in orange or red, since this indicates that the input level is too high. 6 At the bottom of the Main display, adjust the balance of the microphone sound (MIC) with the instrument sound (page 53). Disconnecting the microphone 1. Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position. 2. Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Applying the Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Voice This section covers the Vocal Harmony Effects that can be applied to your voice via the microphone connected in the previous instructions. 1 Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the Mic Setting/Vocal Harmony display. Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing – Make sure lamp does not light in orange or red. 8 2 2 Press the [D]/[E] (TYPE SELECT) buttons to call up the Vocal Harmony Selection display. 3 Select a Vocal Harmony type by using the [A] – [J] buttons. To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ] – [5 ] buttons. NEXT PAGE PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 83 On the display, you can confirm that one of the three icons shown below is assigned to each Vocal Harmony Type. Each of these icons indicates the Harmony mode. Icon Mode Chordal (Microphone) The harmony notes are determined in the same way as in Microphone above. However, effects such as Vocal Doubler and PokerPhaser are applied. Harmony may or may not be applied depending on the selected type. (If harmony is not applied, the [I] (HARMONY) button in the Mic Setting/Vocal Harmony display is set to OFF. (Microphone with FX) (Microphone and keyboard) 4 Descriptions The harmony notes are determined by the chords you play in the chord section (with [ACMP] turned on), the left hand section (with [ACMP] turned off and [LEFT] turned on) or the chord data of a Song. Vocoder The microphone sound is output via the notes you play on the keyboard or via the Song playback notes. Vocoder Mono Same as the Vocoder basically. In this mode, only single-note melodies or lines can be played back (with last-note priority). Follow the steps below, depending on which Type (and mode) you selected. If you selected the Chordal Vocal Harmony Type: 4-1 Turn the [ACMP] button on. 4-2 Play chords with your left hand, or play back the Song which contains chord data. Vocal harmonies based on the chords are applied to your singing. If you selected the Vocoder or Vocoder Mono Vocal Harmony Type: 4-1 Call up the SETUP window in the display by pressing the [8 ] button. 4-2 NEXT PAGE 84 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you selected a Type having an “FX” icon, your voice will be processed with effects, but may not have harmonies applied. 4-2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to change the Keyboard setting (OFF, UPPER, LOWER), if necessary. Select UPPER to have the Vocoder effect applied by your right-handplayed part, LOWER to have it applied by your left-hand-played part, and OFF not to have any Vocoder effect by your keyboard playing. For more information on the Keyboard setting to control the Vocoder effect, refer to the Reference manual on the website. 4-3 Play melodies on the keyboard or play back a Song, and sing into the NOTE For Vocoder, the effect is applied to a maximum of three notes of the chord you play; for Vocoder-Mono, the effect is only applied to a single note (last note played). Using the Talk function Turning the Talk function on by pressing the [G] (TALK) button in the Mic Setting display lets you temporarily cancel the microphone effects or vocal harmony. This is useful when you want to talk between songs during a performance. You can also change the Talk settings to suit your preferences. For details, refer to the Reference Manual. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 8. Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control parameters: [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [D]/[E] (TYPE Editing the Vocal Harmony Types: [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [D]/[E] (TYPE 8 SELECT)  [8 ] (SETUP) SELECT  (select a Vocal Harmony type)  [8 ] (EDIT) • Editing the Overview tab parameters: • Editing the Part tab parameters: • Editing the Detail tab parameters: Microphone (Vocal/Talk) settings:  TAB [][] OVERVIEW  TAB [][] PART  TAB [][] DETAIL [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [A]/[B] (MIC SETTING)  TAB[][] VOCAL/TALK Saving the Microphone settings: [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [A]/[B] (MIC SETTING)  [H] (USER MEMORY)  [6 ] (SAVE) PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Microphone – Adding Vocal Harmony Effects to Your Singing – microphone. You’ll notice that you don’t actually have to sing pitched notes. The microphone sound is output via the notes or note you play on the keyboard or Song playback. 85 9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over various sonic aspects of the keyboard parts and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds. Basic Procedure 1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. 3 2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. PANEL STYLE (1/2 or 2/2) SONG (CH 1-8 or CH 9-16) Song, Style, Multi Pad, MIC (only PSR-S950), Keyboard parts (Left, Right 1, 2) Page 1: Rhythm 1, 2, Bass, Chord 1, 2, Pad, Phrase 1, 2 Page 2 (only PSR-S950): Rhythm 1, 2, Audio Part: Song channels 1 – 8 Part: Song channels 9 – 16 NEXT PAGE 86 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual NOTE You can switch between the Pages and Parts of STYLE and SONG by pressing the [A] (PART) button. 3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired page. For details about each display Page, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. • FILTER: • TUNE: • EFFECT: • EQ: 4 5 Changes the Voice for each part and adjusts panning and volume for each part. Adjusts the Harmonic Content (resonance) and sound brightness. Pitch-related settings (tuning, transpose, etc.). Selects the effect type and adjusts the effect depth for each part. Adjusts equalization parameters to correct the tone or timbre of the sound. Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select a parameter, then use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the value for each part. Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings. • To save the PANEL display settings: Register them to Registration Memory (page 79). NOTE If you simultaneously hold down one of the [A] – [J] buttons and use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons (or the DATA ENTRY dial), you can instantly set the same parameter value to all other parts. • To save the STYLE display settings: Save them as Style data. 1. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [B] STYLE CREATOR 2. Press the [EXIT] button to close the REC CHANNEL display. 3. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for saving your data, then save it (page 26). • To save the SONG display settings: First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SETUP), then save the Song. 1. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [F] DIGITAL REC MENU  [A] SONG CREATOR 2. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the CHANNEL Page. 3. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “SETUP.” 4. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button. 5. Press the [I] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save it (page 26). 9 Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 9. Editing VOL/VOICE parameters: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] VOL/VOICE Editing FILTER parameters: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] FILTER Editing TUNE parameters: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] TUNE Changing an Effect type: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] EFFECT  [F] TYPE Editing EQ parameters: [MIXING CONSOLE]  TAB [E][F] EQ PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – • VOL/VOICE: 87 10 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – This chapter covers the terminals and jacks of this instrument. For details on the locations of these connectors, refer to “Panel Controls and Terminals” on pages 12 – 13. CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/LINE IN] jack) To the [MIC/LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4” phone jack), you can connect a microphone, guitar, or other various equipment. For instructions on connecting a microphone, refer to page 82. Note that you need to select “MIC” or “LINE IN” depending on the connected equipment. When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set the [MIC LINE] switch to “MIC.” When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer, keyboard, CD player) is high, set the [MIC LINE] switch to “LINE.” 88 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) NOTE Using an External Stereo System for Playback Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks. When using the PSR-S950, the microphone or guitar sound connected to the instrument’s [MIC/LINE IN] jack is output at the same time. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. NOTE Powered speaker Input jack Phone plug (standard) Phone plug (standard) Audio cable When these are connected, you can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. NOTICE Do not route the output from the [OUTPUT] jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the equipment. Playing a Portable Audio Player with the Built-in Speakers You can connect the headphone jack of a portable audio player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, letting you hear the sound of that portable audio player through the built-in speakers of the instrument. Portable audio player Headphone jack Stereo mini plug NOTICE When the sound of an external device is output to the instrument, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Otherwise, damage to the instrument and external device may occur. NOTE The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the [AUX IN] jack. Stereo mini plug Audio cable PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 89 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – NOTICE When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Otherwise, damage to the instrument and external device may occur. Because this instrument’s power may automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off function (page 15), turn off the power to the external device, or disable the Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate the instrument for a while. 10 Connecting a Separate TV Monitor ([VIDEO OUT] jack) You can connect the instrument directly to an external TV monitor for displaying the lyrics and chords of your song data on a large screen. CAUTION Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain. VIDEO OUT Video cable RCA pin plug VIDEO IN Screen Out Settings 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SCREEN OUT 2 Set the monitor type and screen contents. [1 ]/ [2 ] MONITOR TYPE Selects the desired output monitor type (NTSC or PAL) to correspond to the standard used by your video equipment. NOTE The instrument’s default setting for the external TV monitor signal is “PAL.” Depending on your particular locale, the standard may be different and the setting should be changed accordingly. (For example, NTSC is generally used in North America.) Check the standard used by your TV monitor, and if it is not PAL, change the setting to “NTSC.” [3 ]/ [4 ] SCREEN CONTENT Determines the contents of the Video Out signal. LYRICS/TEXT: Only the lyrics of the Song or text files are output, regardless of the display that is called up on the instrument. LCD: The currently selected display is output. 90 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller ([FOOT PEDAL] jacks) Optional footswitches (Yamaha FC4 or FC5) and an optional Foot controller (Yamaha FC7) can be connected to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks. A footswitch can be used for switching functions on and off, while a foot controller controls continuous parameter such as volume. Default functions FOOT PEDAL 1 Switches sustain on or off. Use an FC4 or FC5 footswitch. FOOT PEDAL 2 Controls the Super Articulation Voices (page 35). Use an FC4 or FC5 footswitch. NOTE FC4 FC5 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Do not connect or disconnect the pedal when the power is on. FC7 By assigning the function for each foot switch/controller, you can conveniently control sustain and volume with either pedal jack or control many other functions by pedal. • Example: Controlling Song Start/Stop by footswitch Connect a footswitch (FC4 or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks. To assign the function to the connected pedal, select “SONG PLAY/PAUSE” in the operation display: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] FOOT PEDAL. 10 Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10. Assigning specific functions to each foot pedal: [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] FOOT PEDAL PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 91 Connecting a USB Flash Memory ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal) By connecting a USB flash memory to the instrument’s [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can save data you’ve created to the device. Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices Using USB Flash Memories • USB flash memory • USB hub The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: By connecting the instrument to a USB flash memory, you can save data you’ve created to the connected USB flash memory, as well as read data from the connected USB flash memory. http://download.yamaha.com/ Up to two USB flash memories can be simultaneously connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB flash memories that can be used simultaneously with the instrument even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. Maximum number of USB flash memories allowed Formatting USB flash memory When a USB flash memory is connected, a message may appear prompting you to format the USB flash memory. If so, execute the Format operation (page 93). NOTICE The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash memory you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash memories. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash memory. If you are saving data to the USB flash memory, make sure to disable write-protect. NOTICE • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB storage device during playback/recording, file management (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations) or accessing the USB storage device. Failure to do so may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB storage device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB storage device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. NOTE • If you intend to connect two USB flash memories at the same time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. • (PSR-S950) The instrument supports USB 1.1 and 2.0. • (PSR-S750) Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. 92 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Turning off the instrument When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash memory by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash memory and the data. Formatting a USB Flash Memory When a USB flash memory is connected, a message may appear prompting you to format the USB flash memory. If so, execute the format operation. 1 Connect a USB flash memory for formatting into the [USB TO DEVICE]. 2 Call up the operation display. NOTICE The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash memory you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash memories. [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] MEDIA NOTE Playback of Style, Song and Multi Pads is stopped to enable execution of the format operation. 3 3 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 4 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the USB flash memory to be formatted from the device list. The indications USB 1 and USB 2 will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices. 4 Press the [H] (FORMAT) button to format the USB flash memory. Confirming the remaining memory You can check the remaining memory of the connected USB flash memory by pressing the [F] (PROPERTY) button. Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal) By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-related Operations” on the Yamaha website (page 7). NOTE • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. NOTICE Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. USB cable PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 93 10 Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals) Use the MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices (keyboard, sequencer, etc.). • MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device. • MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument to another MIDI device. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI device MIDI transmit MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI receive (playback) For detailed information about the instrument’s MIDI settings, refer to the Reference Manual. NOTE For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to “MIDI Basics” which is downloadable from Yamaha website (page 7). Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10. MIDI settings: 94 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual [FUNCTION]  [I] MIDI  [8 ] (EDIT) 11 Utility – Making Global Settings – The Utility section in the Function menu provides a variety of convenient tools and settings for the instrument. These include general settings that affect the entire instrument, as well as detailed settings for specific functions. Also included are data reset functions and storage media control, such as media formatting. Basic Procedure 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [I] UTILITY 2 2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up desired page. Utility – Making Global Settings – • CONFIG 1 General settings such as Fade in/out time, Metronome sound, Parameter lock, Tap Tempo sound, Auto Power Off. • CONFIG 2 General settings such as displayed items for Voice/Style selection display, popup display time, etc. • SCREEN OUT (PSR-S950) Monitor type and display content settings which are necessary when connecting a TV monitor (page 90). • MEDIA Settings related to a connected USB flash memory, such as formatting (page 93) and confirmation of memory size. • OWNER Settings of Owner name, Message language (page 16) and background of the Main display. Parameter setting backup/restore operations (page 31) can also be done in this page. 11 • SYSTEM RESET Resets the settings of the instrument. 3 If necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired parameter. 4 Change the settings by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons or execute the operation by using the [D] – [J] buttons. For details of the Utility settings, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 95 Troubleshooting Overall A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the instrument. There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard. This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system. Some Voices have a looping sound. Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the Voice. The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard. The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/ [RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on. The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 53). Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (pages 52, 57). Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, muting the sound. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off. The sound is distorted or noisy. The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. This may be caused by certain effects or filter settings. Check the effect or filter settings and change them accordingly, referring to the Reference Manual. Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 99) of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback volume. The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 53). The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on. This may occur if a USB flash memory has been installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB flash memories may result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the device. Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the file/folder name (page 16). An existing file is not shown. The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted. Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a computer. Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of characters to 50 or less. When the power is turned on, the message “The USB storage devices cannot be authenticated” appears. 96 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual If a protected Expansion Pack is installed to the instrument, in order to use the Voices or Styles contained in the Expansion Pack you need to connect the USB flash memory which was used for installing. Connect the proper USB flash memory to the instrument and turn the power to the instrument on again. Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound. Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 35). If necessary, press the appropriate PART ON/OFF button to turn the part on. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts. Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some Voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. Style The Style does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Rhythm channel of the selected Style may not contain any data. Turn the [ACMP] button on and play left-hand section on the keyboard to sound the accompaniment part of the Style. Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard. Styles in a USB flash memory cannot be selected. If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be handled by the instrument. Song Songs cannot be selected. This may be because the language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song file name. If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be handled by the instrument. The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) button. Song playback stops before the Song is finished. The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function. The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [G](REW)/ [H](FF) buttons. This happens when playing back music data for which a specific, fixed tempo is set. When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 57). The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. Troubleshooting Song playback does not start. PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 97 USB Audio function The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and then the recording was aborted. Make sure to use a compatible USB flash memory (page 92). Make sure that the USB flash memory has enough memory (page 68). If you are using a USB flash memory to which data has already been recorded, check first that no important data remains on the device, then format it (page 93) and try recording again. Audio files cannot be selected. The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The compatible formats are: MP3 and WAVE (PSR-S950), WAVE (PSRS750). The DRM protected files cannot be played back. Recorded file is played back at a different volume compared to when it was recorded. The audio playback volume has been changed. Setting the volume value to 100 plays back the file at the same volume as when it was recorded (page 67). Mixing Console The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. Microphone/Vocal Harmony (PSR-S950) The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song recording. Use the USB Audio function (page 67). Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound. Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 83). The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of-tune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy this: • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. • Use a unidirectional microphone. • Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume control (page 14, 53). Foot Pedal The on/off setting of the footswitch connected to the FOOT PEDAL jack is reversed. Turn the instrument’s power off, then turn it on again without pressing the footswitch. [AUX IN] jack Sound input to the [AUX IN] jack is interrupted. 98 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual The output volume of the external device connected to this instrument is too low. Increase the output volume of the external device. The volume level reproduced via this instrument can be adjusted by using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Specifications PSR-S950 Interface Width x Height x Depth (without Music Rest) Weight (without Music Rest) Number of Keys Keyboard Type Touch Response Pitch Bend Wheel Controllers Modulation Wheel Type Display Panel Tone Generation Polyphony Contrast Language Language Tone Generation Technology Number of Polyphony (Max.) Number of Voices Voices Preset Featured Voices Expandability Expansion Voice Editing Compatibility Part Number of Styles Preset Featured Styles Fingering Styles Style Control Compatibility Expandability Other Features Preset Songs Recording Data Format Multi Pads Preset Audio Voices Styles Functions Songs Multi Pads Expansion Style Expansion Audio Style Music Finder (Max.) One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Recording Function Playback Recording Number of Multi Pad Banks Audio Link Voice Creator Harmony/Echo Panel Sustain Mono/Poly Voice Information Style Creator Style Recommender OTS Information Song Creator Score Display Function Lyrics Display Function Lesson/Guide Performance Assistant Technology (P.A.T.) Multi Pad Creator PSR-S750 1,002 x 148 x 437 mm (39 7/16” x 5 13/16” x 17 3/16”) 11.5 kg (25 lbs., 6 oz.) 11 kg (24 lbs., 4 oz.) 61 Organ Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2 Yes Yes 5.7 inch color LCD 5.7 inch B/W LCD (320 x 240 dots TFT QVGA) (320 x 240 dots STN QVGA) — Yes English, German, French, Spanish, Italian English AWM Stereo Sampling 128 786 + 33 Drum/SFX Kits + 480 XG + 678 + 28 Drum/SFX Kits + 480 XG + GM2 + GS (for GS Song Playback) GM2 + GS (for GS Song Playback) 62 Super Articulation, 23 Mega 38 Super Articulation, 18 Mega Voices, 27 Sweet!, 64 Cool!, 39 Live!, Voices, 24 Sweet!, 46 Cool!, 29 Live!, 20 Organ Flutes! 10 Organ Flutes! Yes (approx. 64 MB max.) Voice Set XG, XF, GS, GM, GM2 Right 1, Right 2, Left 408 325 25 +Audio, 1 FreePlay, 350 Pro, 295 Pro, 30 Session 32 Session Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4, BREAK, ENDING x 3 Style File Format, Style File Format GE Yes Yes (approx. 64 MB max.) — 2,500 Records 1,200 Records 4 for each Style 5 Unlimited (depending on USB flash memory capacity) 16 approx. 300 KB/Song Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF SMF (Format 0) 126 banks x 4 Pads 123 banks x 4 Pads Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo Yes Yes PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 99 Specifications Size and Weight PSR-S950 Registration Memory USB Audio Demo/Help Functions Overall Controls Miscellaneous Number of Buttons Control Recording Playback Time Stretch Pitch Shift Vocal Cancel Demonstration Metronome Tempo Transpose Tuning Octave Button Scale Type Text Display Function Wallpaper Customization Direct Access Reverb Chorus DSP Master EQ Part EQ Effects Mic Effects Vocal Harmony Storage Connections Number of Presets Number of User Settings Vocal Effect Internal Memory Internal Memory (for Expansion Pack) External Drives DC IN Microphone AUX IN Headphones OUTPUT VIDEO OUT FOOT PEDAL USB TO DEVICE USB TO HOST MIDI Amplifiers and Speakers Amplifiers Speakers Pedals Assignable Functions Power Supply AC Power Adaptor Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories Optional Accessories AC Power Adaptor Headphones USB-MIDI Interface Footswitches Foot controller Keyboard Stand PSR-S750 8 presets/bank (unlimited number of banks, depending on USB flash memory capacity) Registration Sequence, Freeze .wav .wav,.mp3 .wav Yes — Yes — Yes — Yes Yes 5 – 500, Tap Tempo -12 – 0 – +12 414.8 – 440 – 466.8 Hz Yes 9 Presets Yes Main, Lyrics — Yes 44 Presets + 3 User 106 Presets + 3 User 71 Presets + 3 User DSP 1: 295 Presets + 3 User, DSP 1: 295 Presets + 3 User, DSP 2-4: 295 Presets + 10 User DSP 2-4: 128 Presets + 10 User 5 Presets + 2 User 28 Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left, Multi Pad, Style x 8, Song x 16) Noise Gate x 1, Compressor x 1, — 3Band EQ x 1 44 — 60 — 23 — approx. 6.7 MB approx. 1.9 MB approx. 64 MB USB Flash Memory, etc. (via USB TO DEVICE) 16 V Yes — Yes Yes R, L/L+R Yes — (optional) Switch or Volume x 2 Yes Yes In/Out 15 W x 2 13 cm + 2.5 cm dome tweeter (x 2) 13 cm + 5 cm (x 2) Volume, Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, Glide, S. Articulation, Song Play/Pause, Style Start/Stop, etc. PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha 16 W 13 W Yes • Owner’s Manual • Online Member Product Registration You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet in order to fill out the User Registration form. • Music Rest • AC Power Adaptor (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) This may not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha HPE-160 UX-16 FC4/FC5 FC7 L-6/L-7 (The exterior size of the PSR-S950/S750 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument.) * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 100 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Index Symbols Chord Match ................................... 70 G +Audio.............................................44 Chordal ........................................... 84 GM .............................................. 6, 42 Computer ........................................ 93 GROOVE (Style Creator) ................ 53 Computer-related Operations ........... 7 Numerics GS..................................................... 6 CONFIG 1/2 .................................... 95 Guide .............................................. 58 1-16 (Song Creator) ........................63 Contrast .......................................... 16 GUIDE MODE ................................. 58 COPY (File) ..................................... 28 Guitar .............................................. 88 A-B Repeat................................59, 66 H AC Power Adaptor ..................14, 100 D Harmonic Content........................... 87 Accompaniment ..............................43 Data List............................................ 7 Harmony/Echo ................................ 39 Adaptor ...........................................14 DELETE (Delete) ............................. 29 Headphones ................................... 13 ADD TO FAVORITE .........................78 Demo ........................................ 17, 33 ADD TO MF ..................................... 77 Direct Access ................................. 21 AI Full Keyboard..............................45 Drum Voice ..................................... 32 I Air Vents ..........................................12 DSP ................................................. 40 Icon................................................. 30 INFO. ............................33, 36, 71, 81 ASSEMBLY (Style Creator)..............53 Input Level ................................ 23, 83 Audio ...............................................64 Audio Link ....................................... 71 E Input Volume............................. 23, 82 Audio Style ...................................... 44 EDIT (Vocal Harmony) .................... 85 Intro section .................................... 46 Audio Volume ..................................66 EFFECT ..................................... 39, 87 Auto Accompaniment......................43 EFFECT/EQ ..................................... 42 Auto Fill............................................47 Ending section ................................ 46 K Auto Power Off ................................15 EQ ................................................... 87 Keyboard Part................................. 35 Expansion Pack .............................. 36 KEYBOARD/PANEL .................. 39, 42 Backup ............................................31 F L Balance .....................................53, 67 Factory-programmed Settings ........ 31 Lamp Status.............................. 46, 80 Bar.............................................22, 56 Fading In/Out .................................. 47 Language ....................................... 16 BASIC (Style Creator)......................53 Fast Forward ................................... 55 Left Hold ......................................... 35 BASS (Style Channel)......................52 File ............................................ 25, 26 Left part .................................... 34, 35 Beat .................................................22 File Selection Display...................... 24 Lyrics ........................................ 57, 90 Break (Style)....................................47 Fill-in section ................................... 47 B FILTER ............................................ 87 FOLDER (File) ................................. 27 C Foot Controller ................................ 91 CENTER (Volume Balance).............67 Footage........................................... 41 CHANNEL .......................... 53, 57, 63 Footswitch ....................................... 91 Character entry ...............................30 Force-quit........................................ 15 CHD1/2 (Style Channel) .................. 52 Format....................................... 64, 93 CHORD .....................................45, 63 FREEZE ........................................... 81 CHORD FINGERING .................45, 53 M Main Display ................................... 22 Main section ................................... 47 MASTER TUNE ......................... 38, 42 MEDIA............................................. 93 MegaVoice...................................... 35 Message ......................................... 21 Metronome...................................... 61 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 101 Index A CUT (File)........................................ 28 Microphone ..................................... 82 Q STYLE SETTING ............................. 53 MIDI Basics ....................................... 7 Quick Recording ............................. 60 SUSTAIN......................................... 40 Synchro Start ................44, 46, 55, 70 Mixing Console................................86 Synchro Stop .................................. 46 MONITOR TYPE ..............................90 MONO .............................................40 R SYS/EX. (Song Creator) .................. 63 MP3 .................................................64 REC................................................. 23 SYSTEM RESET ........................ 31, 95 Multi Pad .........................................69 REC MODE (Song Creator) ............ 63 Multi Pad Creator ............................72 REC WAIT ....................................... 23 Multi Track Recording .....................62 RECOMMEND................................. 50 T Music Finder....................................73 Record (Music Finder) .............. 73, 75 Talk ................................................. 85 Music Notation ................................56 RECORD EDIT ................................ 78 Tempo............................................. 47 Music Rest....................................... 12 Recording (Audio) .......................... 67 Text ........................................... 57, 90 Recording (Song) ........................... 60 Time Stretch.............................. 44, 67 Reference Manual............................. 7 Touch Response............................. 40 N REGIST BANK................................. 80 Transpose....................................... 38 NAME (File) ..................................... 28 Registration Memory ....................... 80 TUNE .............................................. 87 NEXT (Song Playback)....................55 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE .......... 81 TV Monitor....................................... 90 NEXT CANCEL ................................55 Repeat ...................................... 59, 66 TYPE SELECT ................................. 83 REPERTOIRE .................................. 48 RESTORE........................................ 31 O One Touch Setting (OTS) ................ 49 Organ Flutes Voice..........................41 ORGAN TYPE..................................41 OTS INFO. ....................................... 50 Rewind ............................................ 55 RHY1/2 (Style Channel) .................. 52 Right 1-2 parts ....................32, 33, 35 ROTARY SP SPEED ........................ 41 OTS Link..........................................49 S OWNER .....................................16, 31 S.Art! (Super Articulation Voice) ..... 35 SAVE (File) ...................................... 26 SCALE TUNE ............................ 38, 42 P.A.T (Performance Assistant Technology) ....................................63 PAD (Style Channel)........................52 Panel Setting ...................................73 PARAMETER (Style Creator) ...........53 PASTE (File) ....................................29 Pause ..............................................55 Percussion Voice.............................32 UP (File) .......................................... 25 USB (File Selection Display)........... 24 USB Audio ...................................... 64 USB Flash Memory ......................... 92 USER (File Selection Display)......... 24 OTS Link Timing ..............................49 P U Score............................................... 56 SCREEN CONTENT ........................ 90 SCREEN OUT ................................. 90 SEARCH (Music Finder) ................. 76 SETUP (Vocal Harmony) ................. 84 SFF/SFF GE....................................... 6 Single Finger ................................... 45 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ............... 54 Performance Assistant Technology (P.A.T)..........................63 SOLO .............................................. 52 PHR1/2 (Style Channel)...................52 Song Creator................................... 63 Phrase Mark ....................................56 SONG SETTING .............................. 63 Song................................................ 54 UTILITY ........................................... 95 V Version Number.............................. 17 Vibrato ...................................... 39, 41 Vocal Cancel .................................. 67 Vocal Harmony (VH) ....................... 82 Vocoder .......................................... 84 Vocoder Mono ................................ 84 Voice............................................... 32 VOICE SET...................................... 42 VOL/VOICE ..................................... 87 Volume..........................14, 53, 66, 67 VOLUME/ATTACK .......................... 42 Pitch ..........................................38, 87 Speaker..................................... 13, 89 W PITCH BEND RANGE......................39 Split Point .................................. 35, 53 WAVE.................................. 64, 67, 71 Pitch Shift ........................................67 Standard MIDI File (SMF) ............... 54 Portable Audio Player......................89 STEP REC ....................................... 53 Power Adaptor ................................14 Style ................................................ 43 X PRESET (File Selection Display) .....24 Style Creator ................................... 53 XF...................................................... 6 Protected Song ...............................67 Style File Format (SFF) ...................... 6 XG............................................... 6, 42 Style Recommender ....................... 50 102 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual Index PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 103 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu) Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques. Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels. Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC. En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprié des déchets. Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits. [Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne] Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d'informations. [Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne] Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée. (weee_eu) FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digita Keyboard Model Name : PSR-S950/S750 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) 1-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON ARRANGER WORKSTATION KEYBOARDS Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha. ©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 DMI4 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 PSR-S950/S750 Owner’s Manual 109 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2012 Yamaha Corporation 205POZC*.*-01A0 Printed in Indonesia ZA70190